Overview of ERP SAP Introduction What is SAP Landscape SAP General FAQ Basic System Navigation Question SAP

R3 Transaction Codes SAP R3 Tables mySAP Certification Criteria SAP Logistics Modules Material Management Logistics Execution Warehouse Management Sales and Distribution Production Planning and Control Quality Management Plant Maintenance Project System SAP Financial Modules Financial Accounting and Controlling SAP Human Resources Personnel Management

Generic SAP Topics SAP Tickets - What Is That? What Is Maintaining SLA What Are Functional Specification? Role of a SAP Functinal Consultant Role of SAP Consultant In Testing

SAP Books and eBooks Sams Teach Yourself SAP in 24 Hours (3nd Edition) SAP NetWeaver For Dummies Supply Chain Management Based on SAP Systems ... browse more SAP Books

New SAP Tips Just Arrived Roles and Responsibilities of End Extracting Data of Workflow Users Log What Are SAP End User Manual The top ten IT skills to have for the next few years Mini SAP System Requirement and How to Get It What Is User Specific Parameter Implementing SAP R 3 Successfully Implementing SAP Exchange Rate Billing Documents Rebate Management Tables Used Datasource Change Owner Done By Who Options To Handle Manufacturing Materials Restrict Specific Programs In SA38 and SE38 Major Area In Extended warehouse Management Check for Partner on Equipment Master (IE01) What Is SAP Service Management PP/DS Planned Order From APO To ECC Explanation Of LSO Transaction Codes

ABAP/4 FAQ System Administration - Data Dictionary SAP Basis Components - Reporting Administration In SAP - Data Modeler - Dialog Programming ABAP Workbench - SQL/Performance ABAP Programming Hints - SAPscripts BDC Programming Tips - User Exits ABAP Functions Examples - Workbench Organizer BAPI Programming - Sample Exam Questions ABAP Questions Cross-Applications Components SAP Forms Business Information Warehouse Sapscripts Advanced Planner and Optimizer SmartForms SAP Business Workflow Handling Units Management SAP Functional vs ABAP Document Management System

Training Learning ABAP or SAP Application SAP Jobs Forum for SAP Recruiter and Jobs Seekers SAP Jobs Opportunity SAP Links Links of SAP websites

SAP Data Migration with LSMW Production Planning Process Computer Aided Test Tool Industries Flow Customer Relationship Management Customer User Exit For Billing Explanation Of Purchasing Info Record Re-run Released Cost Estimate For Material Network Scheduling In Project System Documenting HR Rules And Schemas Control Of Expiry Date For Inspection Retro Billing And Self-Billing

Miscellaneous Contents Oracle Database, SQL, Application, Programming Tips Java Programming Hints and Tips Unix System Administration Hints and Tips Linux Administration Hints and Tips

SAP was founded in 1972 in Walldorf, Germany. It stands for Systems, Applications and Products in Data Processing. Over the years, it has grown and evolved to become the world premier provider of client/server business solutions for which it is so well known today. The SAP R/3 enterprise application suite for open client/server systems has established a new standards for providing business information management solutions. SAP product are consider excellent but not perfect. The main problems with software product is that it can never be perfect.

The main advantage of using SAP as your company ERP system is that SAP have a very high level of integration among its individual applications which guarantee consistency of data throughout the system and the company itself. In a standard SAP project system, it is divided into three environments, Development, Quality Assurance and Production. The development system is where most of the implementation work takes place. The quality assurance system is where all the final testing is conducted before moving the transports to the production environment. The production system is where all the daily business activities occur. It is also the client that all the end users use to perform their daily job functions. To all company, the production system should only contains transport that have passed all the tests. SAP is a table drive customization software. It allows businesses to make rapid changes in their business requirements with a common set of programs. User-exits are provided for business to add in additional source code. Tools such as screen variants are provided to let you set fields attributes whether to hide, display and make them mandatory fields. This is what makes ERP system and SAP in particular so flexible. The table driven customization are driving the program functionality instead of those old fashioned hard-coded programs. Therefore, new and changed business requirements can be quickly implemented and tested in the system. Many other business application software have seen this table driven customization advantage and are now changing their application software based on this table customizing concept. In order to minimized your upgrading costs, the standard programs and tables should not be changed as far as possible. The main purpose of using a standard business application software like SAP is to reduced the amount of time and money spend on developing and testing all the programs. Therefore, most companies will try to utilized the available tools provided by SAP. What is Client? What is the difference between Customization and Configuration? The difference between cutomizing and configuration is: - CONFIGURATION: we will configure the system to meet the needs of your

business by using the existing data. - CUSTOMIZING: we will customise or adapt the system to your business requirements, which is the process of mapping SAP to your business process. - CLIENT: A client is a unique one in organizational structure, can have one or more company codes. Each company code is its own legal entity in finance. Configuration vs. Customization When considering enterprise software of any type, it is important to understand the difference between configuration and customization.The crux of the difference is complexity. Configuration uses the inherent flexibility of the enterprise software to add fields, change field names,modify drop-down lists, or add buttons. Configurations are made using powerful built-in tool sets. Customization involves code changes to create functionality that is not available through configuration. Customization can be costly and can complicate future upgrades to the software because the code changes may not easily migrate to the new version.Wherever possible, governments should avoid customization by using configuration to meet their goals.Governments also should understand their vendor's particular terminology with regard to this issue since words like "modifications" or "extensions" often mean different things to different vendors. *-- Sivaprasad, Sonali Sardesai What is SAP R3? We know that SAP R/3 is software, it particular it is client-server software. This means that the groups/layers that make up a R/3 System are designed to run simultaneously across several separate computer systems. When you install Microsoft Excel on your PC, each component of Excel (printing components, graphing components, word processing components, and etc.) is stored, managed, and processed via the hardware of your PC. When a company installs SAP¶s software each component (or "layer´ in R/3¶s case) is stored, managed, and processed via the hardware of separate and specialized computer systems. Each of the various layers is capable of calling upon the specialty of any of the other installed layers in order to complete a given task. Those components/layers that are requesting services are called ³clients´, those components/layers that are providing services are called ³servers´. Thus the term *-- Shailesh Kumar (shailesh_das@yahoo.com) ³client/server´. What is meant by SAP ECC?

SAP is an ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) module, ECC is the version of SAP, like 4.6, 4.6c and 4.7 in that series new version is ECC-6. Its known as Enterprise core component.

What is SAP Landscape?
By: Kunal Landscape is like a server system or like a layout of the servers or some may even call it the architecture of the servers viz. SAP is divided into three different lanscape DEV, QAS and PROD. - DEV would have multiple clients for ex: 190- Sandbox, 100- Golden, 180- Unit Test. - QAS may again have mutiple clients for ex: 300- Integration Test, 700 to 710 Training. - PROD may have something like a 200 Production. These names and numbers are the implementer's discreet on how they want it or they have been using in their previous implementations or how is the client's business scenario. Now whatever you do in the Sandbox doesn't affect the other servers or clients. Whenever you think you are satisfied with your configuration and you think you can use it moving forward, you RE-DO it in the golden client (remember, this is a very neat and clean client and you cannot use it for rough usage). As you re-do everything that you had thought was important and usable, you get a transport request pop up upon saving everytime. You save it under a transport request and give your description to it. Thus the configuration is transported to the Unit Test client (180 in this example). You don't run any transaction or even use the SAP Easy Access screen on the 100 (golden) client. This is a configuration only client. Now upon a successful tranport by the Basis guy, you have all the configuration in the Testing client, just as it is in the Golden client. The configuration remains in sync between these two clients. But in the Testing client you can not even access SPRO (Display IMG) screen. It's a transaction only client where you perform the unit test. Upon a satisfactory unit test, you move the good configuration to the next SERVER (DEV). The incorrect or unsatisfactory configuration is corrected in Golden (may again as well be practised in the sandbox prior to Golden) and accordingly transported back to 180 (Unit Test) until the unit test affected by that particular config is satisfactory.

Sandbox server: In the initial stages of any implementation project. Application Server . to be transported to Production server. In testing server tester check/test the program and then transport it to Production Server. In summary: Landscape : is the arrangement for the servers IDES : is purely for education purpose and is NOT INCLUDED in the landscape.Once the BBP gets signed off. Later it will deploy to client from production server. Database Server . Any changes/ new develpoment is done is development client and the request is transported to production.Where SAP GUI have. 1. Presentaion Server. Developer develop their program in Development server and then transport it to test server. QUALITY : is where the core team members and other members test the customization. 2. DEVELOPMENT ---> QUALITY ----> PRODUCTION DEVELOPMENT : is where the the consultants do the customization as per the company's requirement.Where Database installed. Production Server: This is the last/ most refined client where the user will work after project GO LIVE. A request will flow from Dev->Qual->Prod and not backwards. PRODUCTION : is where the live data of the company is recorded. the configuration is done is development server and saved in workbench requests. complete and final configuration that is being used in the implementation. What is the meaning of "R" in R/3 systems? . 3.The Golden client remains the 'database' (if you wanna call it that) or you may rather call it the 'ultimate' reference client for all the good. You are given a sandbox server where you do all the configuration/customization as per the companies business process.Where SAP Installed. They organised their office in these three way. These three are landscape of any Company. Development Server: .

It is also known as the Configuration Menu. 1) Presentation 2) Application 3) Database Why do we call client 000 as golden client? Golden client contains all the configuration data and master data so some extent. What SPRO stands for? SPRO stands for SAP Project Reference Object .SAP Project Reference Object. All the configuration settings are done in golden clients and then moved to other clients. . How to close a window? If we want to stop a transaction in the middle. Right click on the end button (X) on the top right corner of the window. It is used to configure the setting as per your client requirement by using the standard setting present in the system. SPRO is basically used to organize the consultant customizing during the SAP Project Phrase.Implementation Guide. As we dont have STOP icon as we have in WINDOWS. Then select "stop transaction". Hence this client acts as a master record for all transaction settings. Type in the T-Code SPRO under That got to Main Menu which is IMG. This where you can do all the SAP configuration work. What is full form IMG and SPRO? How are they different from each other? IMG :.R/3 stands for realtime three tier architecture. R/3 means three layers are installed in Different system/server and they are connected with each other. SPRO :. This is the kind of architrecture SAP R/3 system has. SPRO------>IMG. this will help in the same way. hence the name "Golden Client".

.Dynamic Menu . After the user chooses ENTER. While creating a secondary list.Its a very small tip. the system acts as follows: While creating the basic list. the system terminates the corresponding processing block and keeps displaying the previous list level. After the user confirms the message using ENTER. After the user chooses ENTER . the system terminates the report. (Concept of PARAMETER ID) Name the three different kinds of messages in the R/3 system.Command Field Why do you create user-specific parameters? They supply defaults to R/3 fields. the system automatically fills in default value. E (=Error) or W (=Warning): The system displays a message of this message type in the status line. These message types have the following effects during list processing: A (=Abend): The system displays a message of this message type in a dialog window. . the entry can also be replaced with a value entered by the user. Depending on the field definition. What is a data dictionary or repository? Central catalog that contains the descriptions of an organization's data and provides information about the relationships between the data and its use in programs and screens. the system resumes processing at the current program position. S (=Success): The system displays a message of this message type on the output screen in the status line of the currently created list. What is the difference between them? A message can have five different types. I (=Information): The system displays a message of this message type in a dialog window. the system terminates the entire transaction (for example SE38). If a field is indicated. Tips by : Bhaskar Name two ways to start a transaction. but will help a lot.

Code se16 and type in CUS_IMGACH table. Paste IMG Activity and run. The ABAP/4 Dictionary stores system-wide data definitions. A matchcode allows you to locate the key of a particular database record (e.Shipping 5.. the Dictionary tool does all the processing necessary to create the definition. VA00 .g. i. how could you do that? User maintenance transactions allow the system administrator to create and maintain user master records. You will see Tcode that belongs to IMG Activity. point it and go to Edit-Display IMG Activity.e. Tips by : Rohan SAP SD Transaction codes List I found a way to know hidden customizing Tcodes.Billing .Sales 4. Before executing customizing task you desire. VS00 . account number) by entering any field value contained in the record. When you create a new data definition.Sales Support 3. What is a matchcode? Comparsion key. data that describes other data.The data descriptions in a Data Dictionary is also called metadata.Transportation 6. VT00 . If you want an end user to see a specific menu after logging on the R/3 system. VF00 . Then mark activity. VC00 . Execute. Go to T. VL00 . You can use the Dictionary tool to look up the "definition" of objects in your R/3 System.Master data 2. This includes the generation and assignment of authorizations and authorization profiles. The system then displays a list of records matching the specifications. SAP SD Tips by: Javier The most frequently used transaction codes are as follows: 1.

Display Customer 2. V/08 .Sales order change · VA05 . VOV6 .Display Inquiry Sales & Distribution Sales order / Quote / Sched Agreement / Contract · VA01 .Define Sales documents type (header) 2.Change Order · VA03 .OVKP . VL04 . VL01 .Flag for Deletion Customer XD01 .Scedule line categories 6. CO09.To create material determination condition record 4. OVAL .Pricing 9. Create Other material ----MM00 3.Display Order · VA02 .Assign Item categoreies(Item cat determination) 5. V/06 .Display Customer VD04 . VB11.Create outbound delivery with ref sales order 6. OVAU .Create Order · VA02 .List of sales orders · VA32 .Pricing proc determination 11.Customer Account Changes VD06 .Collective processing of delivery 7.Material availability Overview 5.Create Inquiry VA12 .V/07 .Modify Customer XD03 .Define delivery types 8.Assigning Sales area to sales documents type 3.Contract change .Maintain pricing procedure 10. VOV8 . OVAZ .Scheduling agreement change · VA42 .Change Customer VD03 .Access sequence Enduser: 1. OVLK .To assign blocks to relevant sales documents type 7. VA11 .Others as follows: At Configuration: 1.Change Inquiry VA13 .Create Customer XD02 .Order reasons 4. Customer Master Creation-VD01 and XD01 (for full inclu company code) VD02 . VOV4 .

Create Quotation · VA22 .Output for shipments General · VKM3.Display Customer invoices by line · FBL1N .ASSIGN DELIVERY PLANTS and thenVK11 to maintain the condition record for the tax rate.List of outbound deliveries for goods issue · VL06P .Display Vendor invoices by line Delivery · VL02N .ASSIGN COUNTRY TO TAX PROC OVK3 --.List of sales documents · VKM1 .CONDITION TABLE OBQ2 --.CUSTOMER TAX CATEGORY OVK4 --.TAX DETERMINATION RULES OVK6 --.Cancel goods issue · VT02N .Delivery due list · VKM5 .Cancel Billing document · VF04 .List of blocked SD documents · VD52 .Change Quotation · VA23 . VKM4 .Display Quotation Billing · VF02 .List of deliveries · VL06G .List of outbound deliveries for picking · VL09 .Change shipment · VT70 .Material Determination Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 1 How to configure tax? Use the following Tcodes: OBQ1 --.TAX PROCEDURE CAL OBBG --. .Change billing document · VF11 .Change delivery document · VL04 .· VA21 .MATERIAL TAX CATEGORY OVK1 --.Billing due list · FBL5N .ACCESS OBQ3 --.

Combine your Sales Organisations. Define no. 1) At SPRO-->SD-->Sales header-->Assign Sales area to Sales document .Vandna How to find the strategy group in sap sd? Menu path for Strategy Group is: Spro --> Production --> Production Planning --> Demand Management --> Planned Independent Requirements --> Planning Strategy --> Define Strategy Group.Maintain Starategy Group We can see Strategy Group in Material Master Record . OPPT -. Create a vendor account group OBD3 2.MRP 3 . Define tolerance Group for vendor OBA3 5. Define document type and no. range for vendor account group XKN1 3. Create 2 GL accounts FS00 a) Purchases A/c b) S. Assign number range to Vendor account group OBAS 4. range OBA7 a) KA b) KG c) KR d) KZ *-. 3) At VOPA--> Assign Partner Functions to your Account Group & Partner Determination procedure Steps to create a Vendor Master Data at the client level and how do we extend it to different company codes? Follow the following steps: 1. change/block vendor master data XK02/XK05 8.Strategy Group. .Planning -. Create Vendor master data XK01 7. creditors A/c 6. Distribution Channels & Divisons 2) At VOPA-->Assign Partner Determination procedure to your Account Group of Customer Master you are using.I raise a sales order and is getting a error stating that "sales area is not defined".

Getting a pop-up when the Contract is going to expire is not a Standard SAP thing. Goto -.10 .For Make to Stock Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 2 Where do we maintain "Item Category Usage" at the master level? Spro --> Sales and Distribution --> Sales --> Sales Documents --> Sales Document Item --> Define Item Category Usage Item Category Usage: item category usages which control the usage of an item. for example. For Assigning Number Range use T-Code VN01 . Instead of this the Std system has a reminder system where in the open Contracts and Quotaions are popped up when you about to create a sales order. Number Rage are use to define what number to be assign to sales document type. the system response if during document processing an item does not refer to a material but to a text item. Item category usage controls. In internal number range system automatically assign a number to sales document according to number range define in system. This setting is in the Sales order header . Item category usage can also be maintained via the item categories In contracts we are creating quantity contract and value contracts in that we only put the validity period after validity period that contract will close. For this you need to do some programming. for this sales manager can follow up the customer for renual the contract. Number range can be assign Internal or external.Quotation and Outline agreement messages If you want to have different number range for different sales area where the settings to be done.but customer want before one month closing the period system should alert with popup box like this contract is going to close.VOV8 --.For Make to Order 20 . In External number range user manually assign number to sales document.

Reprint a withholding tax certificate for a vendor J1IQ .Create additional excise entry at depot J2I5 .Post an incoming excise invoice (excise supervisor) J1IF01 .Display a subcontracting challan J1IF13 .List subcontracting challans J1IH .Assign excise invoices to a delivery for sales from depots J1INJV .Extract data for excise registers J2I6 .Create an incoming excise invoice (without reference to purchase order) J2I8 .Create an outgoing excise invoice J1IJ .Verify and post an incoming excise invoice J1IX .Year-End Income Tax Depreciation Report J1IR .Download register data J1IS .Prepare a sales tax register J1I3 .Remit excise duty fortnightly J2I9 .SAP SD TCodes For India Transaction Action: J1I2 .Process an excise invoice (outgoing) for other movements J1IU . or recredit a subcontracting challan J1IFQ .Capture an incoming excise invoice (excise clerk) J1IEX_P .VC/2 Display Customer Hierarchy .Create a subcontracting challana J1IF11 .Print excise registers Standard SAP SD Reports Reports in Sales and Distribution modules (LIS-SIS): Sales summary .Make a CENVAT adjustment posting J1IIN .Monthly CENVAT return J1IG .Process exemption forms J1IW .Create outgoing excise invoices in batches J1I5 .Excise invoice entry at depot J1IGA .Transfer excise duty to CENVAT account J2IU .Change a subcontracting challan J1IF12 .Reconcile quantities for subcontracting challans J1IFR .Complete.VDH2 .Adjust withholding tax Item J1INREP .Update the RG 1 and Part I registers J1IEX . reverse.Incoming Excise Invoices (central transaction) J1IEX_C .

15 Outbound Delivery Monitor .MC+M Material Analysis.VL06o Incomplete delivery .MC+2 Material Analysis-Incoming orders .Invoiced Sales .MC+I Deliveries-Due list .MC(E General.MCTA Material Analysis(SIS) .V.VA25 Incomplete Sales orders .VF04 Incomplete Billing documents .Returns .02 Backorders .MC+Y Sales office Analysis.MC+E Customer Analysis.MCV9 Customer Analysis-Basic List .List of Outbound deliveries .MC(U Shipping point Analysis-Returns .VF05 Inquiries list .V.V_NL List customer material info .VA05 List of Billing documents .VL22 Find the list of SAP Transaction codes .SDD1 Display Delivery Changes .V_UC Customer Returns-Analysis .MC+Q Variant configuration Analysis .VA15 Quotation List .VD59 List of sales order .MCTC Sales org analysis .Invoiced Sales .Cr.MC-E Sales office Analysis.MC-O Blocked orders .V/LD Create Net Price List .14 Order Within time period .VL06f Material Returns-Analysis .SD01 Duplicate Sales orders in period .Display Condition record report .MCTE Sales org analysis-Invoiced sales .MC+A Customer Analysis.MC(I Sales org analysis-Returns .MC(B Sales org analysis-Incoming orders . Memo .MC-A Shipping point Analysis .VL04 Billing due list .V/I6 Pricing Report .Sales .V.

Once you entered the screen. Does anyone know about the Table that consist all the T-Code? Listed here are the various ways you can find the list of transaction codes and their usage: Use transaction SE11 .048) you have to change the Fields: Maximum number of hits to 99999 (default 500). or Simply goto transaction SM01.ABAP Dictionary: Fill in the Database table name and click the Display button. you can also view all the tcode available in the R/3 system from here. I heard that there is some table which contains all the transaction codes with their descriptions. Method 1: You must be familiar with the starting characters strings for each of the R/3 application modules.TSTCT table will contain all the Tcodes with Texts. In the Fields: Transaction code. . Assuming you know that most Materials Management transaction codes start with MM.Table contents Display If you want to display all the transaction code (total . .Utilities . although this tcode is to Lock/Unlock any transaction code.Where I can find the list of transaction codes and their usage. or Goto transaction SE93 There are two ways where you can find the list of transaction codes in SE93. type in MM* and press the function key F4 The list of transaction code starting with MM will be displayed. click in Top Menu .TSTC table will contain all the Tcodes and .57.

Execute and the first 500 transaction will be display. If want to display all the tcodes. How do I know what is the menu path for that T Code? Enter Search_SAP_Menu in the command box and when the pop box appears enter.. --Go to table and press Ctrl+ shift + F10 where you will go to table entries. --You cannot edit entries in SE11 unless it contains a Table maintenance generator. So just build a Table maintenance generator. Click on F8 (execute). of hits right at the bottom of the screen. --You can edit through debugging. I know a particular T Code and can enter and work on it. And then select the entries that you want to edit by selecting the checkbox and goto menu Table entry ... type ³&SAP_EDIT´. Add Edit Delete Entry In SE11 Database Table How to edit entries of table in se11 ? To update the data of any table. There you edit and save the entries. . Do not delete any entries using &SAP_EDIT.. click Utilities .. make sure you remembered to change the Fields: Maximum no.it is not recommended. It will activate SAP editing function. go to transaction SE16N. the Tcode and it will give the nodes and menu path.ie IMG. This is helpful only in case of SAP Menu not in case of SPRO .Find .> select change..Method 2: On the Top Menu.

Give the table name . Goto : se11 .Then data (list) screen will be displayed. How can I insert new data in the table? Give the transaction code as se11 In that give the table name and press display Then in that field name above there is delivery and maintenance click the same and change it as display maintenance allowed Transaction Code To View All SAP Tables What is the transaction code to view all SAP (PP) table.Select that and switch 'on' the Debugging mode press enter . Switch ON the Debug Mode the select the particular record then click display then it will take u to Debug Screen when there is a program for sy-ucomm then click F7 Button and then Change Code = EDIT then save the code the afterwards it will take u to edit mode of that particular record.Now select the record which has to be deleted .Instead change it to edit and then save the changes then it will take you to the screen where you can edit that records & also delete that particular records.Then press F6 goes to subroutine where there is field called display . Note: After displaying the contents of the list.or there is some other way to view? By: Riki Paramita .Execute the table with the selection fields .How to delete a record in SE16 ? To delete the records from particular table its easy. .

BOM Positions (detail) MAPL .Routing Group Operations . and all tables within the specified area will be displayed. First. For e.: Some important tables within the PP area : MAST . go to SE16.To browse tables which specified for PP module only. browse the application component (ex : PP).BOM Header STPO . look at the bottom of the screen: Then select components by clicking the + sign to open up the sub-compenent you want.Assignment for Task Lists to Materials PLKO .Routing Group Sequence PLPO . click the Down Arrow next to the Table Name field: Then it will pop-up a screen.Routing Group Header PLSO . then select the sub-component (ex : PP-SFC.Material BOM STKO . for Production Orders related tables). In tcode SE16. you can use SE16 with a specified application component & sub-component.g.

Code Data (payment method. Master Credit Control Area Data (credit Sales Area Data (terms.Business Data Item Status Sales Document . order probability) Customer Master Tax Indicator Partner Function key Output type Customer Master Ship Data Customer/Vendor Link VBAK + VBUK Header Status and Administrative Data Sales Document .Material Descriptions MARA . Customer Customer Customer Customer Customer Payment History Master ± Dunning info Master Bank Data Master Credit Mgmt.Production Order Header AFPO -Production Order Position (details) Related tables in MM area : MAKT .Item Data Partners Document Flow Sales Document Schedule Line Sales Requirements: Individual Records Delivery Document item data.Storage Location Data for Material MAST .General Material Data MARC .Plant Data for Material MARD .AFKO . includes referencing PO Delivery Document Header data Billing Document Header Billing Document Item Shipping Unit Item (Content) Shipping Unit Header SD Delivery DocumeLIPS LIKP Billing Document SD Shipping Unit VBRK VBRP VEKP VEPO .Material to BOM Link Important Tables for SAP SD Sales and Distribution: Table Customers KNA1 KNB1 reconciliation acct) KNB4 KNB5 KNBK KNKA KNKK limits) KNVV KNVI KNVP KNVD KNVS KLPA Sales Documents VBAKUK VBUK VBAK VBKD VBUP VBAP VBPA VBFA VBEP VBBE Description General Data Customer Master ± Co.Header Data Sales Document .

Terms: . Certificate of Attendance from the various SAP courses attended.sap.Once payment is received and confirmation provided.Payroll Configuration.SD Tcodes y y y SAP SD Transaction codes List Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 1 Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 2 Get help for your SAP SD problems SAP SD Forums . It needs to be the classes that SAP Ltd.Certification." Proof of the above must be presented upon registration. arrange and accept. 2.com/trainingcatalog -> type in tacert . For example: HR400 .Certification enrolment must accompany payment (credit card details preferred) before registration will be processed . cancellation (i. A resume. 3. Interview Questions and Configuration mySAP Certification .Criteria For Application The guidelines: Criteria to applying for a SAP Certification without Prerequisites: "All candidates registering for the mySAP Certification Test must ensure that they have at least 2 years SAP implementation experience or have attended at least 15 days of relevant training in SAP.Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP Sales and Distribution Books SAP SD Books . A statement from the Project Manager on Letter Head indicating participant's experience or training.e amendment to dates) is not permitted Here is a link to check dates of certification: http://www.Candidates must meet criteria mentioned . Proof can be given in the following ways: 1.

com/asia/education/ .Select your relevant certification area To register: http://www.com/trainingcatalog Delivery Logistics Execution SAP Certification Exam My SAP SD Certification Experience Sample Questions and Answers SAP SD Exam SAP SD Questions and Answers SD Questions on Corporate Structure Short SAP SD Questions 1 Short SAP SD Questions 2 Short SAP SD Questions 3 Interview Questions Important Tips for Interview for SAP SD SAP SD Interview Questions Interview Question and Answers on SAP SD Some SAP SD Interview Questions 1 Some SAP SD Interview Questions 2 Tables/Tcodes in SAP SD Important Tables for SAP SD SAP SD Transaction codes List SAP Sales and Distribution Book Implementing SAP ERP Sales & Distribution Highly Recommended for those who want to become a SAP SD Expert.com/asia/education/ Quick course search: http://www. and Explanations Retail Information Systems Based on SAP Products SAP SD Premium Paper SAP Sales Order Processing Overview A Step by Step Guide to the .com/certification .Click on "SAP Consultant Certification" . Provides details SD Implementation and Configuration from Basic to Expert level.sap.sap.To find out more about certification test types offered: http://service. Answers.sap.Select Registration .Schedule of test only To check out SAP Educational terms and conditions: http://www. SAP SD Interview Questions.sap.

..more SAP SD Books Free SD Download (PDF) Download: Plain Variant Configuration Download: Sales Process Flow Chart HUM Basic Process of how Packing Works The "Packing Process" with an Example Pricing Difference between Condition Type Accumulate the amt of cond. MM & FI Why Do We Assign Division to Sales Organisation How To Do Master Record Mass Maintenance Serial Number Management In SAP SD Sales Office Address. Billing Report to Check the Entered Pricing Condition Price Mass Update of condition pricing Material Master Price as Sales Price Automatically Customer discounts on effort only Steps to Create Commission for Agent SD Questions About Pricing Condition Add a Field To New Condition Table in Pricing Header Condition and Group Condition Steps Involved In Condition Technique Sales Order Freight Condition In Header Condition How To Use Condition Exclusion Type In SO Pricing Report & Condition Index What Is Condition Base Value . date.Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 1 Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 2 SAP SD TCodes For India Standard SAP SD Reports SD Frequently Asked Question Sales and Distribution FAQ Link Between SAP SD. Process Assign a Cost Center manually in a SO (VBAKKOSTL) Transfer of Requirements What Do You Mean By Transfer of requirements Define Tax Determination Rules Taxation Explain with an example SAP SD: Scheduling Agreement Vs Contract Sales Order Mass Change Release strategy for Sales order How to do rebate processing Rebate Process with Ref. to SO Consignment Sales Process in SAP Issue free goods to selected Customers Supressing Fields in Sale Order Some Light on Batch Determination Diff. Sales Ord. between Item Proposal and Material Determination Steps for SD Variant Configuration Number Ranges In Sales Order What is Debit note and Credit note Explain What Is Credit and Debit Memo Configure Intercompany Stock Transport Order Inter Company Sales Process SAP SD Sales Order Processing Configurations . Change and Assignment Sales Order How To Create Sales Order Duplicate customer purchase order Default First Date is not Today Sales Order Confirm Quantity Date Auto proposed all the dates when creating Sales Order Define Material used at which Sales and Distri. types in accting document Hiding Price Condition Types on a Sales Document Creating New Pricing Procedure What is alt cal type & alt base value & Req field in Pricing Re-pricing in a Quotation Quantity Based Discounts in Bulk Quantities Sales Determine sales price with shipping point Pricing date based on Deliv.

Steps creating new or changing existing Billing Doc Typ Billing Block will not worked if you did not assign it Billing Plan for Milestone Billing Billing Plan Function and Processing Combine Billing for deliveries with different date Billing Spilt by Item Category Max. No. F5 727 Prepaid process possible Restricting Number Of Items In Billing Doc Document Not Relevant For Billing Procedure To Cancel Billing Documents Schedule VF04 For Individual Billing Run Explain The Concept of Resource Related Billing Cancelled Billing Document Has No Accounting Document Retro Billing And Self-Billing Exchange Rate Billing Documents Credit Management How To Do Configuration For Credit Availability Check Management Availability Check on Quotation SD material Determination based on availability MRP block for Credit limit attained Customers check Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking Creating Multiple Materials in Material Sales value field not getting updated after Determination creating billing Backward and Forward Scheduling Diff Between Simple and Automatic Credit Configuring Availability Check Through Check Types Checking Groups Back Order Processing Using CO06 and V_V2 Set Up for Credit Card Payment Processing Dunning Process In Credit Management See The Scope of ATP Check What Is Credit Exposure Account Payable . Exclusion will be determined in the billing doc. of items in FI reached Msg no. KOMG Billing Billing cannot be Release to Accounting Default Start Variant for VF04 Cond.Normal Sales Order Cycle Configuration Default Storage Location In Sales Order Explain The Meaning Of An Open Sales Order Sold To Party In Sales Order Screen Profit Center Default In Sales Order Check Whether The Entries Is Maintain in LIS Update or Not 3PL Purchase Order Link To Sales Order What is the Foreign trade data required in SO for doing Exports Material To Be Added or Excluded To a Customer Sales Order Number Blank In MD04 Partner Functions Partner Determination For Sales Doc Setup Partner Determination Procedure Sales and Distribution BOM Sales BOM Implementation How to Know that Sales BOM is working or not? What Is BOM Referring to SAP SD Pricing Customization For Sales BOM Third Party Sales Process Flow for 3rd Party Sales Cross Selling : How To Configure An Example Of Third Party Sales Sales Information System Difference/Similarities between LIS and SIS Rounding Off Condition Not Appearing In Sales Order How To Create Field in KOMP.

Sales How To Maintain Output Types in SD Printing Block For Credit Block SO Set the number range for Deliveries The internal and external number range for delivery are control by the delivery type. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. First you define the number range for deliveries in 'VN01'. tabstrips Parameters. Assuming you have created a variant TEST .Settlement Downpayment with Installment payment Term Customized SD ABAP Reports Upload Condition Pricing Sales Order Changed History Display User Exits on Sales and Distribution Customer User Exit For Billing CIN SAP SD CIN Configuration Customer Return material From customer Customer Returns and Replacement Orders Customer Wants To Take The Order Back Usage Of Customer Pricing Group Hierarchy Customizing Customer Hierarchy in SD Basic SD Questions On Product Hierarchies How To Configure Product Hierarchy Product Allocation Implement the Product Allocation Functionality Output/Email Sending a billing document by e-mail Customizing picking output Program for Sales Order by Customer. Date.sap-img.com Set the default start variant for VL10 In transaction SU01. Then you assign the number range for the delivery type in transaction '0VLK'. Best regards. SAP Basis.

com Checking Fields with Incompletion procedures for Delivery Define your incomplete procedures in OVA2. This OSS notes will help you in creating the additional fields :198137 .V_TPAR_VUV .VL10: Customer-specific enhancements / user exits 415716 . SAP Basis.sap-img.Parameters LE_VL10_USER_VARIANT for Delivery Creation Value TEST Text Default Selection Parameters Best regards. here you define the Status Group to used 2. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. SAP Basis. There are 3 levels :Groups Procedures Fields -> 1. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. you define whether a warning message should be issued Assign incompletion procedures to partner functions in SM30 .com Adding additional fields to Delivery Due List If you would like to add additional fields to the Delivery Due List Transaction VL04.User exits in delivery processing Best regards. You will need to have a user exit written. These fields do not exist in the list of additional fields in the IMG.sap-img.

sap-img. For those materials already created.V_T001L_D to include/exclude the storage location for MRP. Best regards. In an incompletion procedure you group together the fields that are to be checked for completion. the settings only affect those newly created materials starting from the days you set the parameters. If you have not entered data in one of the fields in the document. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. SAP will not consider the stocks when you do a delivery creation.V_T001L_D. the document is incomplete. billing.Assign incompletion forms to the delivery types in SM30 . Depending on the status group you can block certain subsequent activities for the document. or pricing etc. you can just goto MM02 -> MRP View 4 to include/exclude it for that particular materials only. Take note that when you set the parameters in SM30 .V_TVLK_VUV Assign Incompletion Forms to the Delivery Item Types in SM30 . For every field in the procedure you also have to define whether a warning message should be issued during processing if no data is entered in this field.V_TVLP_VUV Define the Status Group in SM30 . SAP Basis.com Exclude inventory in Storage Locations during Delivery Creation When you exclude MRP planning for a storage location. You used SM30 .V_TVUVS You use this function to block a document for delivery. If you does not wish to include/exclude the storage location for all the materials. you have to changed it manually one by one or write an .

Best regards. if you want to include zero quantity items but if they are all zero. you do not want to create the delivery then you have to used the user exit USEREXIT_SAVE_DOCUMENT_PREPARE. SAP Basis. The steps are set up as a checklist and guide you through the process of configuring the system parameters.sap-img. Set the value to B or C.sap-img. This will prevent delivery with zero lines from being created. Best regards.com SAP WMS .ABAP program to mass changed it automatically. SAP Basis. there is a field Check Quantity 0. However. In the definition of delivery item category 0VLP. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.com Avoiding delivery creation when items quantity are zero Deliveries are created collectively using VL10. . You make the necessary settings for the ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) system within the WMS component (Warehouse Management System). ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.Decentralized Warehouse Management System Integration Setup You can operate the SAP Warehouse Management System (WMS) as a stand-alone decentralized system that is independent of a central Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) System. Checklist (For those with the Table Views used transaction code SM30).

Activate decentralized WMS in Views V_T340DM.) Fields : Plant + Sloc + WhN 2. Assign logical system to client in Views T000. Customizing for "Enterprise Structure" .Create storage location in OX09 (if necessary). are assigned to a specific warehouse number.Delivery-Relevant Data for Warehouse Number .Exclude stock in decentralized WMS in Views V_T321B (if the decentralized WMS is not an SAP R/3 system) .Assign WM movement type references to IM movement types V_T3211 .Finally do a consistency check for decentralised WMS in transaction OL20.Delivery-Relevant Parameters for Reference Movement Type V_T340DL . (Valid if the component MM-IM (Inventory Management) is implemented. like goods movements and physical inventory.Define warehouse number in Views V_T3001.(if necessary) . . Customizing for "Application Link Enabling (ALE)".1. The physical warehouse where these activities take place is identified by the warehouse number. section "Basis Components" Maintaining Logical Systems in Views V_TBDLS. . section "Central processing" -> Application . 4. 3. (you should not copy the warehouse number in the ERP system) Activities within a warehouse.Define interface to Inventory Management in Views :V_156S_WM .Assign plant/storage location to warehouse number in Views V_T320. Make basic settings for RFC in transaction BD97. . Customizing for "Decentralized WMS integration".

section "Maintain Distribution Model" (transaction BD64) Activate the change pointers for master data distribution using transactin BD61. Customizing for "Application Link Enabling (ALE)". As far as the application is concerned. Display or check distribution model Generate partner profile in transaction BD82. SAP recommends that you use message types : "MATMAS" (material master tables) and "DEBMAS" (customer master) as a template. Customizing for "Decentralized WMS integration". (you can also perform this activity using ALE Customizing) Distribute distribution model in transaction BD64 (model view) using menu item "Edit" If both the ERP system and the decentralized WMS are SAP R/3 systems. the distribution model should be distributed on a central basis only. . 7. via the ERP system.5. activate decentralized WMS). application-specific Customizing parameters are modified or set (for example. section "Maintain Distribution Model" You can define the Reduce message types and Activate message types in transaction BD53. when the model is generated. Customizing for "Application Link Enabling (ALE)". that is. Be aware that only those fields that are absolutely necessary are transferred from the master data tables in the ERP system to the decentralized WMS. 6. section "Central processing" -> Distribution Use transaction OL19 to generate distribution model.

com SAP Customizing Picking Output From Release 4. o Carry out Transaction V/53 to assign the picking lists to own forms and programs.5A. Best regards. o Carry out Transaction OVLT to assign the picking list types to the shipping points. reduce the message types concerned with transaction BD53. SAP Basis. Best regards. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.sap-img. 8.If necessary. you can maintain the list as follows: o Carry out Transaction V/38 to maintain the output types."Tools" .General" ."Data Transfer : Material Master" -> "Define required-field check for ALE/Direct Input" (Views V_T130S) Define whether an error message should be generated in the receiving system for required fields from the material master."Material Master" . ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.sap-img. If you want to use the picking list according to the "old" procedure.com Problem in Shipping . the system does no longer display the actions for SD picking in the implementation guide. Customizing for "Logistics . SAP Basis.

On this you can maintain the desired number range. Press "post goods Issue" I am facing this problem: "The number range for the transaction/event WL in year 2004 does not exist" How to solve this problem. Plant and Shipping point in Delivery.. Could you Kindly clarify whether Shipping point is assigned to the Material in Material Master or you can assign the Storage Location. sometimes there is a problem in Shipping. Amol. Put the no Range object as MATBELEG and click on Number Ranges. and go to change mode of delivery. Also If a Plant has mutliple shipping points.which one will be assigned for shipping after Delivery created I also had an error log while creating Transfer order LT03 saying Postings not possible for specified date. After selecting click on the change/maintain button. I am facing a problem in Shipping. Then click on Change Groups.Is there a way to solve this problem in Deliveries? Pritam When creating a Sales Order. Here you can put the year as 2004 or any future year.I am new to SD. the system determines the shipping point with the customising that you do in Logistics Execution > Shipping > Basic Shiping Funct > Shipping point and Goods Recieving Point Determination > Assign Shipping points . On determining the Delivering plant. Then select the second row (which includes your WL doc type). Sailendra Go to TCode SNRO. When a SO is created and Delivery then we proceed to Transfer order and Post goods issue. the system first determines the Delivering Plant in the sequence from the following source: 1) Customer-material info record 2) Customer Master 3) Material Master. After finishing the transfer order..

for assigning a posting period do the following T-Code OB52 . the bottom message says posting period possible for 2006/6 and 2006/7 for company code. I could not proceed with the Post goods issue. Hope the above has clarified your querries. Secondly.: Here you enter the Shipping point to be determined for the combination of: a) Shipping Condition (which is assigned in the customer master or Salesdocument type) b) Loading group (which is assigned in the material master) c) Delivering Plant (which has already been determined) As regards storage location the same is determined in the delivery from the combination 1) Shipping Point 2) Delivering Plant 3) Storage condition. See there is may be two kind of problem: Maybe your system installed in back date so check actual movement date. in T-Code MB1C What actual movement date you used for PG Received into your plant."CO-code". Amol. When I click the post goods issue. Fast Links: Get help for your SAP SD problems Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP SD Books SAP Sales and Distribution Reference Books Movement Type Posting Error In Delivery After creating the delivery.

The system automatically proposes the shipping point at item level. OB52. Check for Sales Order . Now you go to /NOMSY and go to position give company code then change the year to 2007 and pd to 03(now March month)and save it. and Update your Posting Period as you desire. Shipping point determination-shipping conditions from (Img of S.Shambhu I have created the outbound delivery and have done PGI & made factory invoice but when I try to make the final invoice .S ystem is showing the error "Delivery type ZINC cannot be invoiced with billing type F2 ". Shipping Conditions and Storage Location Determination Can we configure Shipping conditions at line item level? Shipping conditions is one of the criteria to determine shipping points. Shipping points is determined for each order item in sales order.Ratnakar While creating material stock. You can change shipping point manually in the order. I have tried all MMPV. IMG/ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE/ASSIGNMENT/LOG GENERAL/ ASSIGN PLANT TO CO CODE. Just go to sales Document Type (VOV8). it is not allowing to make the final invoice. OMSY but still stock is not creating. . Now. You go to assign plant to company code and there you de-assign and save it.doc type or customer master record of sold-to party) +loading group of Material master+ delivering plant of customer material infor record.("please check your Company Code is assign to which Varriant T-code OBBP") Customizing => Financial Accounting => Financial Global Setting => Document => Posting Period => Open and Close Posting Period. and Update your Posting Period as you desire => Open and Close Posting Period.> Delivery Type -> Billing type assignment and correct accordingly. *-. again you assign your plant to company code and save it. I am getting an error " Posting Period003 2007 is not open". *-.

2.The system determines the picking location based on a rule defined in the delivery type. the delivering plant. If it is not assigned it is proposed from master record of sold-to-party. Delivery Split Because Of Conflicting Header Data By: Robin Item 000020 . Customizing : Shipping point determination-IMG-Logistic execution-shipping-basic shipping *-.RETA and MARE: These rules are mainly used in trade scenarios.MALA: The picking location is determined based on the shipping point. In your case. Different ship to parties for line items.Delivery split because of conflicting header data (TRAGR 0001<>0002).you have to define all shipping conditions and assign Shipping points for each shipping conditions. . How this error can be removed? What is the reason for such error? Delivery split can occur for the following reasons. the storage location entered in the order item is used in the outbound delivery. The following rules are shipped in the standard system: .Vrajesh function. 1. Different routes for line items. .If storage location for picking is not specified in the order item.You will have as many shipping points for as shipping conditions. 3. Otherwise. Check whether the above data are same for all the line items.In r/3 shipping conditions are assigned to Sales document type. How system determines storage location in sd? . and the storage condition for the material as defined in the material master. Different delivery dates for line items. The following data may cause to split as two deliveries: . the system determines the storage location when it creates the outbound delivery and copies it into the delivery item.

Maintain unique value and then retry. --> Check the shipping conditions are different for the two items. Go to Material Master. Your problem will be solved. The KDGRP item field has the value Z2. VL033 Diagnosis Item 000020 cannot be shipped in the same delivery with the other items in the document because the header data (KDGRP) is different. check in the item data the schedule lines. for both the line items Please check the below: DELIVERY SPLIT: Delivery Split depends on the following criteria: 1) Ship to party 2) Delivery date 3) Plant 4) Shipping point 5) Shipping conditions 6) Transportation group 7) Loading group 8) Item categories of materials . --> Check the Delivering plant of the items.--> Check the shipping points of the two items it may be different. This is not the business requirement. the delivery dates of the line items 10&20 and make sure that both are being delivered on same date. so as you want to do single delivery.Grp". --> Check the item level partner functions in the Sales order is there different ship to parties available for the two items. but in the delivery checked for concatenation it has the value Z1. Getting a delivery split based on different customer group at header level. select Sales: General/Plant view and compare for both the materials what is maintained in "Trans. And make the customer group (VBKD KDGRP ) same for line items 10 & 20 . It should be different. assuming that stock is available for both the materials. How to still create a single delivery document? Item 000020: delivery split due to conflicting header data (KDGRP: Z1 <-> Z2) Message no.then single delivery will happen. Delivery split happens because of the customer group also. --> Check the loading group of the two items.

Departure zone or country of the delivering plant. . 3. then in system on 25 Feb we create delivery document with PGI.Define Shipping Types Path: Under the Same Menu path---Define Shipping Types Select New Entries and Assign the Shipping Type (e. By: Kevin Route is determined automatically in the sales order based on: 1. 5. picking.e on 14 feb 2008 and 25 feb 2008 If the first delivery (14 feb 2008) is created and PGI is done this means on this delivery date customer has received the goods. Shipping condition from the customer master. Example : A sales order is confirmed with 2 schedule lines i. 4. 2. Route Determination In Sales Order Explain the basic concept of route process in Sales Order. this means on this date goods will reach customer after completing the transportation planning. Destination zone or country of the Ship to Party. Transportation group from the material master. packing and transit.Define Modes of Transport Path: Spro²Logistics Execution²Transportation²Basic Transportation Function--Routes²Define Routes²Define Modes of Transport. Follow this:Step: 1 .g. Step: 2 . here you can create delivery only on 25 feb not before this due date. Partial Delivery option will be set in customer master record sales area ----> shipping-> partial deliveries. Road or Train) and Assign Mode of Transport (Mdtr) and Assign Shipping type Procedure group. For the second delivery date ( 25 feb 2008). then the system proposes different delivery dates or schedule lines dates based on material availability.Delivery split happen when the requested quantity by customer is not full met. Weight Group. loading.

Maintain Stages for all Routes.Step: 3 . Transportation Group assigned to the material + d. Enter the Transportation Zone id. Path: Under the Same Menu path--. The country & Transportation Zone of the ship to party (in CMR) Route can be manually overwritten during a sales order processing. Select the New Entries and Enter the Details Then Select the Routes stages and define Step: 5 .Define Routes and Stages. Shipping Conditions agreed in the sales document type or with the sold to party + c. Step: 7 . Go to Customer master data.Define Transportation Connection Point.Define Transportation Connection Point Path: Under the Same Menu path--. Path: Under the Same Menu path--. Path: Under the Same Menu path---Maintain Stages for all Routes.Define Transportation Groups. and save You will get the route. In Address of General data. The country and the Departure Zone of the shipping point + b.Maintain Route Determination Path: Under the Same Menu path--Maintain Route Determination. Step: 4 . ROUTE DETERMINATION Step: 6 . You can redetermine the route in the outbound delivery based on weight (weight group) provided it is allowed in the configuration of the delivery type.Define Routes and Stages. Select the Shipping point and enter the Country and Transportation Zone Step: 8 . Path: Under the Same Menu path---Define Transportation Groups Step: 9 .Define Transportation Zone Path: Spro²Logistics Execution²Transportation²Basic Transportation Function--Routes²Route Determination²Define Transportation Zone. The system takes into account the following 4 conditions for determining the Route ± a.Maintain County and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point.Maintain County and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point. .

You enter them in the purchase order. If the material availability date or the transportation planning date falls before the order date. Pick/Pack Time + d.Scheduling takes into account the following times ± a. Planned delivery costs can be differentiated as follows: Origin of Costs i) Freight charges ii) Customs charges Calculation of Costs i) Fixed amount. 2) A delivery costs that are not planned in a purchase order and are not entered in the system until the invoice is received. Transit Time + b. The loading time and pick/pack time come from the shipping point whereas the transit time and transportation lead time come from the route. or a customs office before the purchase order is created. a carrier. Planned delivery costs: Planned delivery costs are agreed upon with the vendor. irrespective of delivered quantity . Transportation Lead/Planning Time. The system performs backward scheduling first to confirm the required quantity checking the material availability on the material availability date. the system automatically carries out forward scheduling and will propose a future date. A delivery type can be customized to carry out rescheduling if required during the delivery processing Planned Delivery Cost and Unplanned Delivery Cost ERP SAP ==> SD SAP ==> LE SAP What is planned delivery cost and unplanned delivery cost? By: Chung 1) A delivery costs that are planned in a purchase order and are entered in the system (invoice). Loading Time + c.

Post them to separate G/L accounts The system distributes the unplanned delivery costs automatically in the ratio of the value invoiced so far to the values in the current invoice. the shipping condition is proposed from the master record of the sold-to party.Distribute them prorated to calculated invoice items . Therefore.) . the unplanned delivery costs do not debit stock accounts or account assignment objects. You can post unplanned delivery costs as follows: .shipping. The shipping condition is proposed from the sales document type if a shipping condition has been assigned to it.ii) Quantity-dependent amount iii) Percentage of value of the goods Unplanned Delivery Costs: Unplanned delivery costs were not agreed on in the purchase order and are not entered until the invoice is received. You can enter the unplanned delivery costs in the invoice document alongside the costs incurred. If not. Shipping conditions are maintained for which partner function in customer master? Shipping condition is maintain in Ship to Party partner function ( sales area data tab -. The system posts unplanned delivery costs to a separate G/L account. Shipping Condition Route Determination And Loading Group SAP Functional Modules ==> Logistics Execution Where is the "Shipping Condition" maintained in a customer master? Shipping condition is maintained in the shipping tab under sales area data of customer master.

Shipping conditions will be defaulted from the CMR of SP. But system will not search the shipping point while searching the route. Shipping point will be determined only if it is assigned to the plant from the config. So shipping conditions will not consider two times while searching the route. Shipping condition and Loading group plays a vital part for shipping point determination . Does the system takes the shipping condition twice in search of the route? When the system search for the route it will search through route determination like this: Shipping point*(*Sales order)** and Departure Zone **(From the order shipping point*)*+Shipping condition*(*Customer master which you enter in the order*) *+Transportation Group*(*from material master which you entered in the order**)+destination zone*(*transportation zone of the Customer in the order**)->Route System will determine the shipping point in the sales order based on these selection Shipping conditions+Loading group+Plant-->Shipping point. check the Delivering Plant in Customer master record in XD02 & check the shipping point assignment in OVXC. The combination of shipping condition (Master data of customer /Vendor) + Loading group (material master) + Plant. For the Customer assigned to the receiving Plant. OR) then it will have priority and will replace the value defaulted from CMR. determines the shipping point. Batch Determination In Delivery . After determining the shipping point then only the system will start to search route. If a value exists in the sales document type (eg. What is the significance of the shipping condition and loading group? Both the shipping condition and loading group are useful in Stock transport order.

Requirement is that during batch determination in delivery system should only pick the batch for which remaining self life is at least 45 days. But I have one issue in that.LOBM_VERAB availability date . This concerns all characteristics starting with LOBM_*.LOBM_VFDAT expiration date.LOBM_BWTAR valuation type . I have created customer specific strategy/condition record.I have configured the batch determination in delivery and it is working fine. So for each customer I have to maintain the days in characteristic (Which characteristics can be used?) There is std Self life expiration date char is exist in the system you have to activate that.LOBM_MBDAT material availability date .LOBM_LFDAT required delivery date . shelf life .LOBM_LVORM deletion flag .LOBM_LGORT storage location . These are: . LOBM_VFDAT (tcode is BMSM) This function updates the standard characteristics in the classification system reserved for batch management so that they meet the requirements of any new functions.LOBM_RLZ required remaining shelf life of batch . The days of remaining self life is based on the customer.LOBM_QNDAT next batch check date .LOBM_ZUSTD status .LOBM_KRT required waiting days for batch .LOBM_MENGE quantity . For customer A it should be 30 and for B 45 etc.

.User Exit for Staging Area Determination (Item) .User exit for storage location determination . List Of User Exit Related to VL01N I need to some restriction in fields ( Actual GI Date.Collective processing for delivery creation .Delivery Monitor: User Exits for Filling Display Fields .Collective processing for delivery creation . T-Code:Vl01n ).LOBM_UDCODE usage decision .: Selection w.LOBM_QSCORE quality score from usage decision You need to execute this function in the following cases: .Batch determ. after copying other clients .LOBM_RLZ_PROZ required remaining shelf life as a percentage .User exit for gate + matl staging area determination .After defining object dependencies for standard characteristic LOBM_RLZ . you receive a log in which all the activities performed are listed. for this.In newly created clients.Calculation of Stock for POs for Shipping Due Date List .Rough workload calculation in time per item . How do you find out whcih user exits belongs to VL01n ? Here is the list of user exit related to VL01N : V02V0001 V02V0002 V02V0003 V02V0004 V50PSTAT V50Q0001 V50R0001 V50R0002 V50R0004 V50S0001 V53C0001 . remaining life LOBM_RLZ.User Exits for Delivery Processing .Sales area determination for stock transport order .LOBM_BPRIO stock determination: priority .In every client after a release upgrade When the report for updating the standard characteristics has been completed.Delivery: Item Status Calculation . Update Standard Characteristics in BMSM and also Refer SAPNote 33396 .

V53C0002 V53W0001 VMDE0001 VMDE0002 VMDE0003 VMDE0004 . Outbound) .Sold-to party or ship-to party If you only enter a ship-to party. Enter the following data: .Shipping Interface: Message SDPICK (Picking. the system uses the sold-to or ship-to parties. The system then copies the selected sales area into the entry screen. The sales areas (sales organization. if necessary. to derive the sales area. the organizational data. If there are several sold-to parties or sales areas for one ship-to party. Choose Enter. If there are several sales areas for that particular sold-to or ship-to party. division) are derived from the sold-to or ship-to parties. Enter the order type and.shipping material type/time slot . proceed as follows: In the initial screen. distribution channel. the system uses this to determine the sold-to party and if necessary. .Shipping Interface: Message SDPACK (Packing. a dialog box appears where you can choose the one you require.Shipping Interface: Message PICKSD (Picking. Inbound) .Shipping Interface: Error Handling . Choose Order Create (VA01). Inbound) How To Create Sales Order What are the steps to create a sales order? To create a standard sales order. which you entered in the overview screen.W&S: RWE enhancement . If you do not specify a sales area in the initial screen. the sales area. choose Logistics . for distribution channel and the division are usually proposed from user-defined parameters. This means that you do not have to enter the sales area when you create a sales document. The values for sales organization. Entries for the sales office and the sales group are optional.Sales and distribution . you can choose the right sales area in the following dialog box.Inbound IDoc .User exits for creating picking waves .Sales.

Ship-to party . If you enter a sold-to party that is also a unique ship-to party.Unloading point . it displays a screen on which you can choose between several delivery proposals. Enter all necessary data. you defined several unloading points or several ship-to parties in the customer master record of the sold-to party. If the system carries out an availability check and finds that there is insufficient stock for an order item to be delivered on the requested date. Duplicate customer purchase order If you are facing a problem with duplicate customer purchase order as your company does not allowed a same customer purchase order with the same sales order type. choose the corresponding menu entry. If.Payer . . If you want to change data for the items.Bill-to party Select the valid data from these proposals by positioning the cursor on the line and choosing Choose. for example. select the items before you choose a menu entry. As soon as you have selected this data. If you want to enter further data for the header or items.Choose Enter. You can activated the check for duplicate purchase order with "VOV8". Save your document. You can find more information about this in Reactions to the Availability Check in Sales Documents. the system displays the alternatives in a dialog box.Customer purchase order number . the system automatically copies it as such and informs you in the status bar. .Order quantities for the materials .An error message appears in the status bar to inform you if the system is not able to determine a sold-to party.Material numbers . The system can display alternatives for any or all of the following data: ± . the material data that you have entered is displayed.

Nobody change system configuration.In the General Control Section.sap-img. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.OR . default First Date was always today.Returns etc. look for the field Check Purchase Order No and put in "A". default First Date wasn't today. you will find that someone have actually change the configuration as it could not be a software bug since you have been using it for quite sometime without any problems. why? Note: 1. The date is control by each Sales Order Type for each Sales Document type whether is it a . after checking.Standard Order. it is very unlikely that the system will mis-behaved after one day. SAP Basis. Usually. 2. . Best regards. This should be blank if you want the system to propose current day for delivery date. Verify the Sales order type configuration with the following path: IMG: Sales and Distribution --> Sales --> Sales Docs --> Sales Doc Hdr --> Define Sales Doc Types (transaction vov8) will let you control this by sales document type. There is one field (Lead time in days) which "specify the number of days after the current date that the proposal for the requested delivery date in the sales document should be".RE .com Default First Date is not Today When end user created a new sales order with VA01. Before today. Sales Order Confirm Quantity Date . Although you mention that nobody change the system configuration.

type and Double-Click. I mean it is unrestricted stock. I have created a sales order for 6 Tons. It should have been blank . Code: OVLZ Field: Pick/pack time wrkdys whether you have maintained any value.I have a stock of 10 Tons which is not reserved for any Sales order. select your sale order type and check the Field "Lead Time in Days". For example.pick/pack times. The other possibility could be holidays. I'm using service material in my sales order and I need the schedule line to confirm the quantity always in the actual day (not depending on the delivery date). Check Box: Immediate Delivery (press F1 to read more about this functionality). Check in OVLZ ---> In Pick/pack time wrkdys. transit time.. After creating sales order system should show as Doc date for confirming quantity for dispatch but it is showing the next day in the schedule line. Code: VOV8 Select your Sales Doc. What could be the reason? The reason could be there should be processing times configured in the system like. Also go to VOV8. Please check the shipping point and also the route for different lead times. system will allow to do PGI only after 5 days from the date of order created. Note: There are few more settings that you may check: 1. if 5 is given in this field. for that you can go to the schedule line of the item and click on the Procurement tab. T. First check what the requested delivery date you have put in the order. In Tab: Shipping. any value is maintained there. Next check the lead times. T. even if stock is available on the same day of order creation.SAP SD User Ticket: Confirm quantity date is next day.

Code: VOV8 Check how many days mentioned in Lead time in Days. T. Code: OVZ9 Checked the Box: Check without RLT . After making the necessary IMG changes. If it is mentioned any days. Testing: Now. try creating a new sales order for the material and SAP will auto proposed all the dates in the sales order.Goto VOV8.. .2.Look and tick the fields Propose delivery date and Propose PO date. you need to input the Delivery Plant field for each Materials that you want the system to propose the default date. double click on sales order type. Select the View Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 and fill in the Delivery Plant. Define whether the Material can be used at which Sales and Distribution process Here you define how the system responds when entering a sales and distribution document with this material in the differenet Sales and Distribution Process Flow. 3. . To change the Materials field Delivery Plant: Goto MM02. 4. Follows this step to set the default Sales Order Type proposal date: . T. Check in material master MRP2 view how many days are maintained for the fields In-House production and GR Processing Time Auto proposed all the dates when creating Sales Order How can I make the system auto create all the Sales Order date during creation? Each Sales Order can have different date proposal settings. remove it.

no dialog 2. Click Maintain and double click into the Materials Status code. then the field cost center is active for input during transaction VA01. Alternatively. the sales and distribution document cannot be entered on the basis of the material status) Assign a Cost Center manually in a Sales Order (VBAKKOSTL) The Cost Center Determination settings is in OVF3 . Table Views V_TVMS. for example. However the standard SAP works only at the header level though. You can set three types of reponse for each Sales and Distribution process :1. If the document category for order type in IMG VOV8 is defined to be "I" which belong to order type FD . The cost center are assign for such business transactions as : .Free of Charge. OR To temporary block the creation of Sales Order for a certain materials. error message (that is. Set the material status parameters in transaction SM30. warning when entering the document 3. so it would not work if cost center is needed on the line item. to prevent orders from being entered for parts to be discontinued. you can specify an order reason and assign a cost center to an order reason.You can use the material status.Deliv.but there are some cases where the Cost Center must be exceptionally changed.

Materials planning transfers the reported requirements and creates orders or purchase requisitions from them etc.Free deliveries . You must define a check group. for example: Order reason: Damage in transit Order reason: Free sample Both the IMG settings are done in transaction OVF3. The system checks the availability of the goods based on the requested delivery date of the customer and creates MRP records which contain all necessary information for passing on to planning.Requirement class It specifies the following points: .. 4. OVZG . For controlling transfer of requirements. Best regards.Returns . either with/without the order reason. you have to carry out the following steps: 1. 2. It is possible to have this check group proposed for the initial creation of a material master record. Note that a plant must exist for transfer of requirements to be carried out at document item level. 3. It ensures that the goods are available in time for the delivery. Each requirement type has to be allocated to one requirement class only.Transfer of Requirements The MRP department is informed about the quantities and deadlines by which incoming orders should be delivered.Deliveries of advertising materials You can also make cost center allocation dependent on the order reason. the sales documents at schedule line level. The transfer of requirements must be switched on at requirements class level. Sales and Distribution .

whether an availability check and a transfer of requirements is carried out for a transaction (for sales documents. (Use transaction SM30 for V_* configuration) OVZH .the results analysis key. What Do You Mean By Transfer of requirements Explain transfer of requirement? How it works and how to configure? It specifies the following points: 1.Define Checking Group V_TMVFU . .the allocation indicator from the sales view which controls the settlement of customer requirements with requirements . The allocation indicator from the sales view which controls the settlement of customer requirements with requirements. Whether the requirements are relevant for MRP.the settlement profile. 2. fine tuning using the schedule line category is possible).. Whether an availability check and a transfer of requirements is carried out for a transaction (for sales documents. This can be configured by creating requirement class and requirement type and in the corresponding schedule line category requirement had to be checked. then the system creates a TOR for the supply of goods to PP.Assignment of requirement type to Transaction V_TVEP_V .whether the requirements are relevant for MRP. You can overwrite the default value for the checking group in the material master record. The results analysis key. 5. 6.Requirements type V_TVEPZ_V . then the system check for availability of goods. fine tuning using the schedule line category is possible).Define the checking group that the system proposes when you create a new material master record. If the availability of goods is not there. 3. The settlement profile. . . 4. When a sales order is raised. . Then PP can do procure or produce the goods.Schedule line category OVZ2 . .whether an item is to be settled to an auxiliary account assignment. Whether an item is to be settled to an auxiliary account assignment.

the sales documents at schedule line level.schedule line category The transfer of requirements is controlled globally using the requirements class which is derived from the requirements type for all sales document types.requirements type . The transfer of requirements must be switched on at requirements class level. 2. The following sections on the transfer of requirements describe how to control the transfer of requirements. The requirements type and. fine tuning is also possible at schedule line level. you have to carry out the following steps: 1. .requirement class . Materials planning transfers the reported requirements and creates orders or purchase requisitions from them etc. The transfer of requirements is basically dependent upon the following factors: .check group . For performing transfer of requirements. Each requirement type has to be allocated to one requirement class only. requirements class are determined in the strategy group so all changes made there should also be coordinated with production. It ensures that the goods are available in time for the delivery.The MRP department is informed about the quantities and deadlines by which incoming orders should be delivered. Note that the requirements classes are also used in production so you should coordinate any changes to the requirements classes with production. For the sales document types. eventually. This fine tuning is described in the section "Defining the procedure for each schedule line category". The system checks the availability of the goods based on the requested delivery date of the customer and creates MRP records which contain all necessary information for passing on to planning.

using the country key. tax condition type "MWST" for taxes on sales and purchases). therefore. the elements of tax calculation are predefined (for example. More than one tax type can be defined for a country by defining the sequence. Requirements transferred to planning are further processed in the module MM. You must. You must define a check group. Note that a plant must exist for transfer of requirements to be carried out at document item level. Define the Material Taxes in OVK4. VK12 . 4. you will maintain the tax code in Customer Master. the SAP System recognizes which tax type is valid for a plant and thus which taxes are relevant when creating an SD document. Define Tax Determination Rules You specify the valid tax types in transaction OVK1. which will then be maintain in Material Master. It is possible to have this check group proposed for the initial creation of a material master record. For example :MWST GST MWST GST 0 1 Tax Exempt Liable for Taxes Now.3. The SAP System determines the taxes automatically within pricing. you define the Tax Determination in VK12. Assign the plant for Tax Determination in OX10.Domestic Taxes/Export Taxes Condition Type Customer Taxes 0 0 MWST Material Taxes 0 1 Rate Taxes 0% 0% . In the standard SAP R/3 System. Define the Customer Taxes in OVK3. coordinate the transfer of requirements with the module MM.

5) In anycase. it would be marked as .D (Not possible to process Manually).1 1 0 1 0% 9% In this example. 3) Now. put the Tax Indicator (at MMR as '0'). if you are selling a goods which are free for tax to any customer. while processing a sales order. as a SAP standard Best Practises. at VK11 you need to mainatain your pricning conditions with all the combinations like: 10 11 01 00 4) While maintaining your Material Master Records or Cusotmer Master Records. the MWST condition Defintions. Tax Code in Customer Master / Sales Order How can we maintain the Tax Code (Tax code . . The rate of tax is depend on various parameteres. you must identify. Tax will be included when you create the Sales Order. which are tax liable and which are tax exempeted. whether is fully liable for tax or expemted (in case of Defence Customer) 2) There are few parameteres which we apply tax condition. at V/06. you must retrieve a Tax condition record from SAP database only and not entered Manually. Whether customer is tax liable? Whether material is tax exempted? For example. If your customer is not liable for tax at all (like the case of Indian Defence organisations) put the Tax Indicator (at CMR as 0) or 1 in case fully tax liable.which we maintain in MWST Condtion Records) in Customer Master or in Sales Order? There are few points which I would like to remind you: 1) MWST is a tax condition which is applied to customer to whom we are selling. If your material is tax liable pur the Tax Indicator (at MMR as 1). the field for 'Manual Entries'. if both the Customer Master and Material Master Tax code is 1. Accordingly.

6) In case your client insists for Manual entry of Tax code during Sales Order processing.e. you can only maintain Tax Indicator and not Tax Code. Once that consignment is received at the ship to party state. sales tax will be levied once the sales is registered there. The invoice that is accompanied with the consignment thus shall not have any final value. The rates are defined by the respective state governments. the ST goes to that state govt. The selling organisations normally needs to register with the sales tax authority of the respective state to have a warehouse or D plant to avoid the double taxation for their dealers/distributors. & consignment is despatched to the Ship to party. For this case. normally. The consignment is transferred from one D plant to another D plant irrespective of inter/intra state sales. At the point of sales from one state. . Taxation Explain with an example I'm assuming that. Stock transfer : This does not attract any sales tax. you can change the field at point 5) above to C-Manual entry is priority instead of D. There may be surcharge cond types as well which will calculate the amount on either JIN1 or JIN2. in which the CST condition type is JIN1 & the LST is probably JIN2. delivering plant & ship to party are within the same state. There are two types of sales taxes.SPRO > S&D > Basic fn. And in Cusotmer Master. Now. the LST that is applicable by the Ship to party further will not be applicable in all probability to be captured in SAP. the pricing procedure that is there in 4. > Pricing > Pricing control > Define & assign Pric. It's a zero value invoice. procedure > Maintain Pric proc. the country is India and based on its requirement: Sales tax is a state government revenue. For config : 1. Local sales tax is intra state whereas CST is inter state. Example of CST : The Delivering plant & Ship to party geographic locations are 2 different states. but the basic prices needed to be mentioned.Due to this setting. you cannot maintain Condition tax code during sales order processing.7 is Factory sale with formula-JFACT. Example of LST : Point of sale i. Local sales tax & central sales tax.

The customer will provide you 4-10 weekly buckets (usually a . Material tax claasi. I will have two options for material master here.2. I will have 1-LST 2%. Typically these are used for component supplier customers (namely Automotive). When I create master records for LST thru VK11 for JIN2. The tax rates are normally driven from the Tax classification of Customer & Material access. Forecast forwards the schedule lines to planning (seen in MD04) and JIT passes them to shipping (VL10). One needs to understand here properly as u need to have unique combinations for picking the sales tax rates. I will chose the access where the combinations of customer & material tax classifications are available. price. AP SD: Scheduling Agreement Vs Contract A schedule agreement contains details of a delivery schedule but a contract just contains quantity and price information and no details of specific delivery dates What's the difference between schedulling agreement with normal order? What's the condition for us to choose schedule line or order? Both of them contains schedule line. Let's say. Same path : But go to Tax relevancy of master records where you configure the condition type & options of rates that will flow to these masters. S&D >Basic fn. Cust-Tax classi.4% & 0%. This is normally a FI job. Standard SAP you should have two sets of tabs . I will try to demonstrate the smallest example.Schedule agreements allow you to have 2 different sets of schedule lines (VBEPABART).of schedule lines. 1 for taxable & 2 for not taxable. To do this config. > Taxes. quantity. 3. rates are flown from the tax codes. They can be identical or different. If this access does not exist create it under an access sequence. The condition records will look like. One Forecast & the other JIT. You need to include the condition type for country IN in 'Define tax determin rule'. For customer master. Rate Tax code 1 1 2% A1 2 1 4% A1 3 1 0% A1 Remember. But normally this is standard. 2-LST4% & 3-LST0%. the LST rates are 2%. Tax codes can be created thru T code FTXP. There are a couple major differences: (1) .

There is transaction MASS which can be used to carry out mass changes in the sales order and other objects. monthly forecasting qtys and entering standard sales orders (with or without multiple schedule lines) to represent the true firm qtys. 1) Try t-code [MASS] and select sales orders & execute 2) Choose the table or tables for your selection criteria and also for fields you want to change. etc.which are entered on the JIT. Sales Order Mass Change I am a SAP SD consultant and recently faced with two new terms. Schedule agreements are very nice when the customer sends EDI data (830s = forecast or 862s = JITs). These qtys are sometimes requested by the customer on ASNs. Also send you 1-2 weeks of individual FIRM ship dates .Monday date) of future forecast qtys. mass order change and ALV . move the fields you want to the "select fields" using arrows. Outside of that they can really cause trouble regarding daily maintenance. missing requirements. . It comes down to the customer not knowing exactly what they need next week. and orders should work the same way too. Then execute. I have done mass change for customers. One alternative would be to use customer independent requirements .From the Pool.entering the weekly. . year end processing. is in "item data" table) 3) Put in the sales documents(21000000. The forecasted qtys they sent last week should account for this. but they don't want to suprise you with a large order qty. (suppose your selection criteria fields are from "sales order header data" table and the field you want to change. Mass Maintenance: (Use to change multiple fields in multiple documents at the same time). Cumulative qtys reset at year end unless you've got a customer calendar or you've modified standard SAP userexits to not reset. cum qty corrections. (2) Cumulative Quantities are tracked and influence how the schedule agreement passes requirements to both forecasting and shipping. 21000001) you want to change and also the items(10) you want to change.click on " choose selection fields" button . where your lead times are 5+ days. I also need to know about the transaction code.

List will be provide for changes Sel Chg Fld: Billing Date Set new billing date value in the New Values field Click on lower billing date column Click on Carry out a Mass Change button Click on Save button Suggestion is to test this on a few orders in your development system to get a feel on how this works before applying this to any production data. If they match. (for example. MASS is a very powerful tool. I want to change plant for item 10) -enter the new value (of the plant to be) -click on "Adopt" and execute 5)In "sales order item data" tab. . Check: Go to [SM37] and see the status of the job you are running and once finished. you see the new value of the plant you entered at the top and the old values of item 10 are below.4)From mass maintenace menu. ask them to deactivate the MODCHECKS still you are done with mass maintenance & activate them again. -click on "change field values" button. Is there a way to change the billing date on a ton of sales orders with same old billing date to a same new billing date? This can be done using the mass transaction: Transaction: MASS Object Type: BUS2032 Tables: SD Document: Business item data Sel Field: Billing Date (MASSSDHE and MASSSDPO) . export the spool file to a spreadsheet.Or you can just select by document numbers (May be more efficient) Execute . go to the particular table in [se16] and get the results. then you are good to go. you see all the old values are changed to new values. -save Note: it will take some time depending on how many records you have. click on "Enter new field values" -click on "sales order item data" tab and choose the field you want to change. Note: If you have any user exits that affect the results. Before you do mass maintenance. Then do the mass maintenance and compare the results with this one.

It will re-price all the sales orders. Balraj G Saigal In order to emulate a release strategy similar to purchase orders you can use the status profile in sales documents (BS02). Release strategy for Sales order Is it possible to have release strategy for sales order? Satish C Jha As such SAP standard does not provide release strategy for sales orders similar to purchase orders. 2. Go to the Menu EDIT --> MASS Change ---> New Pricing. IMG-Sales and distribution-Sales-Sales documents-Define and assign status profile. This is only one way of meeting your requirement. 3. . System will display all the re-pricing options.The payer partner needs toi have the rebate field checked in the customer master on the sales area-billing doc tab.Check the following: 1. then you can do for others.The Billing type must be marked as relevant for rebates. However this requirement of your can be satisfied through authorisation profiles. You can try for one or two order initially check the results and if it is OK. Is there a transaction or program for this? Go to VA05 execute the report.The Sales Organisation must be marked as relevant for rebates. what I mean to say is that the sale order to be kept incomplete by the person who does not have the required authorisation & the person with proper authorisation will complete it for further processing.I have 100000 sales orders whith an incorrect price and I would like to do a massive condition update with pricing type "B" (Carry out new pricing). Select all sales orders you want to update the price. How to do rebate processing Rebates Processs in SAP is divided into three components 1) Configuring Rebates 2) Setting Up Rebates 3) Managing rebate agreeeements and payments Pre-requsiistes. Select B.

alctyp and altcbv does not allow you to manipulate how a rebate is calculated. use the condition technique. remove the requiremnt 24. After defining and creating condition types for rebated include them in the pricing proceedure. it defines how much can be paid out during a partial settlemetn.. When rebate credit memo is created Customer account/ is debited and Accrual provision account is credited. but distinguish themselves from pricing in applying to transactions over time. You need to use the technical names A001 For pricing and KOTe001 for rebates when you use the query type using transaction SE 16. This means multiple tables for an access sequence can be aplied at the same time. Rebate related condition types are identified by codnition class -C. Now payment of rebates: Payments can be maunal or in full settlement. Also. These accurals are based on sales volume and when they are posted billing is created int eh follwoing manner. please note that when rebates are created without dependent ona material but on customer/material you need to refer to a material for settlement.htm .Condition Technique : Rebates. Provision for accruals is debited and Sales revenue is credited. AS after going thru the right path of maintaining access sequence for rebates.com/sap-sd/rebate-process-with-ref-to-so. Also. if u want to see reabtes at order time. You use partial settlement only when rebate agreement is defined for a full year but the paoyouts are supposed to happen on a monthly.So you could have two condition table "001" one for pricing and one for rebates. The big difference between the rebate and the pricing access sequence is that there is no exclsuion flag available for rebate related AS. With Compliment: Srini I have this same problem found in: http://www. The requirement should be 24 here which implies that the accruals are calculated on the basis of invoice/bill. Use create access sequence (AS). Rebates have their wn field catalog and their own condition table naming convention. Enter 1 in field category for rebate specific.sap-img. The other fields. which could have different key fields. When you do manual payments. quarterly or anyother specified period. versus on a transaction basis.

May be I can help you with rebate process. SALES ORGANISATION AND FOR THE BILLING DOCUMENT. The rebates are based on the volume of the business the customer does with you within a specified time. then you activate your rebate porocess. The rebates are passed on to the customer in the form of Credit notes. R. Assign the agreement type to the condition type group Assign the cond type group to the condition type. After having done this please proceed to maintain the condition record for the rebates (transaction code-vbo1) . for eg if the customer agrees for Rs. can somebody explain it as I have problem in understanding the link.ACCRUAL KEY = ERU YOU ALSO HAVE TO DO THE ACCOUNT DETERMINATION FOR REBATES. if at the end of the year the customer DOES achieve the target u offer him say 2/3/4 % whatever is decided. define a condition type group 3.(IN -IMG) 1. This will help you understand better. REBATE ACTIVATION. Condition technique is also used in rebates. What exactly do you wish to know in Rebates? The total outline of the Rebate process or each and every step in the SAP system? First of all rebates are more or less discounts which are offered to customers. define a rebate agreement type 2. This is broadly the outline of the rebate process. define a condition type and place this condition Type in the pricing procedure.However. The rebate can be given to the customer at one time or in installments also. Once you have defined all the 3 and assignment starts.1 Crore worth of business with u in 1 year.Sreeram Note : I recomend you to study the theory part of why rebate and why not a discount.IN CUSTOMER MASTER.(REQUIREMENT=24) ALSO IN THE PROCEDURE.

the rebate will be affected in the billing document and if you dont give the requirement as 24 your rebate will be affected in the sales order. I hope this will be of any help to you. This is what the link says. 2. 4. to SO If I need to make a rebate for a customer what is the process involved. GO TO THE CONDITION RECORD IN CHANGE MODE (VB02) AND SETTLE THE ACCOUNT PARTIALLY. 1. Shrinivas Rebate Process with Ref. AFTER YOU HAVE FINISHED A COMPLETE SALES CYCLE OF CREATION ORDER . boo2 boo3 boo4. I am providing some info on rebates which I know. Create condition record for rebate giving the rebate rate and accrual rate. First you need to create a Rebate agreement. Also it gets copied in the rebate agreement. when the rebate relevent billing doc is generated.amount to be settled. Please make sure you open two screens SO THAT YOU CAN COMPARE THE NEW ENTRIES WHAT EVER YOU'RE DEFINING WITH THAT OF THE STANDARDS or first you try with the standard condition type boo1. create settlement run using credit memo request and then credit memo to settle this amount with the customer. Praveen In a simple way. The document type for the partial settlement is R3. the rebate and accruals are determined and posted in a seperate GL account as a noted item . 3.Note: if you maintain the requirement coloumn with the requirement as 24 . DELIVERY AND BILLING. . The rebate process is completed when you have created a credit memo to the customer.

save the doc no and go to VF02 and say release to accounting Now the final settlement will be this way .condition records specify the rebate rate and the accrual rates. Now when you make the rebate settlement by doiing the Credit memo and you decide to pay $27.go to create with ref and enter ur Sales order no..Conditon records which are created like B001 and B002 are linked to the rebate agreeements specifying the rebate rate + the accrual rates...Rebate agreemnts is based on agreement types. Consider an example.. choose agreement type 0002 and then in conditions give Material rebate 1 20 20 30 Now create a sales order with a material say M-11 for SOrg 1000 12 00 with QTY 6 Now check VB03 and see rebate agreemtent it will say Accruals 120 and payments 0 since your rebate is not settled still. View the credit memo request Remove the Billing bloock Go to VA01 and put order type G2 . Rebate setllement Go to VB02 enter ur sales deal no.... Then go to VF01 and enter the credit memo reqst no generated. You decided to give a rebate of 3% to a customer whose sales vol is $1000 for a particular SO Then the rebate value is $30... and change the agreemetn status to B then enter Shift+F12 and enter the amount to be paid for example u say $80 Then check in rebate payments rebate doc and partial setllemetn since you have not paid in full.save the doc now.. then the accounting will be generated saying 27$ paid towards rebate and 3$ is the accrual which you owe to the customer Procedure: Rebate agreement: Transaction code: VB01 When you go to VB01.

In both the invoice and the credit memo check the posting . 9. Once you have posted the invoices. remove the blocks if any and create an invoice (credit memo). SAP SD Tips by: Priyam How to do a rebate agreement for a specific customers with settings details? 1. enter the customer code. Credit memo request will b generated copy the no. 7. 8. No will be generated choose 003 . clicl on verficayion and it will show the order details. You can see the rebate condition in the invoice only.Accruals:120 Accrual reversed:80 Rebate pay:80 Amount payable:40 So the balance 40 is still the accrual This is an example how a rebate will be processed with ref to a SO with an example. click on the conditions enter the percentage and accrual amount. 10. You also can have scales in this.this will show u the accrual amount. 6. Assign this condition in the std pricing procedure with acct key as ERB and accural key as ERU . the validity and check for the status shld be in Open.release for the settlement.V/08 3. 5. Also you need to maintain the material for the settlement 4. For settlement change the status of the rebate to B . Create a sales order for that customer and check the rebate agreement. then go to rebate agrrement no.Final settlement of agreement already carried out Consignment Sales Process in SAP The consignment process in SAP standard consist of four small processes: .accounting document it will show u the accrual as negative.Customer rebates.Create a Rebate Agreement in VBO1 (It is O = Owl and not zero). Create a condition by copying a a standard condition like BO03 in V/06 2. Again go to rebate aggreement and check the status it will show you D . and go to VA02.

1. Note that in consignment fillup and consignment pickup there are no invoices since there is no change of ownership for the materials. Once he informs that he used the stock you will invoice him. document flow is sales order ---delivery item category. . Consignment return (return materials from customer ownership to customer consignment). How to perform a consignment order? In consignment orders you are allowing the stock to sit in your customer location. Here you have a consignment fillup order and a consignment fillup delivery. In schedule line category.Consignment fillup (send materials to customer consignment). but the materials are issued from the consignment stock instead of plant stock unrestricted). If he returns the stock you will accept the stock to take it back. Here you have a consignment pickup order and a consignment pickup delivery. you will set movement type 631 & set for availability check and TOR. Here you have a consignment issue order. (the flow is very similar to a normal OR flow. you are not invoicing the customer. but the materials are returned to the consignment stock instead of plant stock returns). Consignment issue (issue materials from customer consignment to the customer). It will not be relevent for billing and pricing because you are not charging money for these goods in this step. Here you have a consignment return order. Consignment fill up: Sales document type is KB Item category KBN shedule line category E1 In this step. Consignment pickup (pickup consignment stock and move it to plant stock). (the flow is very similar to a normal RE flow. consignment return delivery and a consignment return invoice. consignment issue delivery and a consignment issue invoice. It is defined in 4 steps.

Sales document type: KR Item category: KRN Shedule line category: D0 You will assign delivery document and billing to sales document. your setting is 633 movement type. In item category. Your setting schedule line item category: 634 movement type. Sales document: KE Item category: KEN shedule line category: C0 or C1 Here you are invoicing the customer(because he used the goods). 4. Once the customer informed you that he used all the goods or partial goods then you will create consignment issue for used goods. you are assigning the delivery documnt and billing document to the sales document. that you are creating this document. you are setting relevent for billing. special stock. Sales document: KA Item category: KAN schedule line category: F0 & F1 Your setting item category relevent for returns. Consignment Pick up: Even if you create the consignment return the goods are not come to direct to your plant. 3. any shedule line category relevent for 632 movement type. return delivery.2. return billing. special stock. For that you need to create consignment pick up. here the owner ship is not changing so you do not need to create billing. you will create return order. Consignment Issue. Your setting item category relevent for billing. . Consignment Return: Customer found that some goods are damaged or he not able to sold the goods he want to send it back. Assign retrun delivery to sales document type. MRP. pricing. pricing. availability check. delivery. In schedule line category. NO availability NO TOR. returns. relevent for availability check & TOR.

Run trans. VBN1 creates it.First select the exclusive button and verify that you are in exclusive view.Sales org. customer # and execute. . How do I set it up? 1. Stock will increase. this should then reflect as cost in our accounts. for example customer A buys 34 cartons of Corn Icecream.Say 34 cartons. VBN2 to first create master record for free goods as follows: Enter following information in selection screen: . If not adjust the calculation parameters in the master record screen It should be transaction VBN1. Now in next screen create the record as follows: . the rest of the system is already up and running and should not be inconvinienced.Now you check your plant stock. (that is if you want exclusive) . (check in what units you want to manage) From: 34 cartons unit of measure: Free goods: 12 Pcs Unit of measure: Pcs Calcualtion type: 1 or try the other options Deliver control: Blank or any of the other options suitable to you. Min qty . The system will automatically propose the free goods item at no additional charge. Rao *-. Sorry for the error. Now save and exit. Now run VA01 for 34 cartons and press enter. distribution channel.Free goods type: NA00 .Material#. we offer him 12 free corns. Try higher order qtys and see if the free goods qty are scaling up. VBN2 is to change the record.Ugameswara Issue free goods to selected Customers Client wants to issue free goods to selected customers after the said customer buys a specified quantity of a good during the festive season starting 02 December to mid January.

maintain pricing procedure say ZFREE with condition type FREE Now assign: 7. create a condition table (free goods) say 555 only for customer group 4.S&D-> Basic > Functions-> Log of incomplete Procedures => select the fields > from the tables and the system will check for them (OVA2/VUA2) To make a filed entry enabled or grey (non-entry allowed): User exits in the program MV45AFZZ-USEREXIT_FIELD_MODIFICATION This user exit can be used to modify the attributes of the screen fields. Active Free goods Determination or Assign with your sales organisation this procedure ZFREE 8.4 and can be edited together during a modification in ABAP. If a field has no field name. add a feild catalog for CUSTOMER GROUP 3. create a sequence say FREE with condition table 555 5. the screen fields are allocated to so-called modification groups 1 . it cannot be allocated to a group.Kris J If you want to give free goods to some of the customers than 1. To do this. create a condition type say FREE with 6. create a customer group say 99 for FREE GOODS In Free Goods Menu: 2. The usage of the field groups (modification group 1-4) is as follows: . Create free goods determination with transaction code /nvbn1 for FREE with Key Csuomer Group 99 for exclusive Give customer Group say 99 and from 34 to 34 free 12 Supressing Fields in Sale Order To make optional / mandatory you can use in IMG .

Below is the sample code IF SCREEN-NAME = 'VBKD-ABSSC'. ENDIF. This FORM routine is called up by the module FELDAUSWAHL. For this we use userexit FORM USEREXIT_FIELD_MODIFICATION in MV45AFZZ. SCREEN-INPUT = 0. If you require changes to be made. With Compliments by: Martishev Sabir Some Light on Batch Determination On batch determination. SCREEN-INPUT = 1. We are doing it in our company. how it is determined automatically in the order. AUTHORITY-CHECK OBJECT 'ZMV45AFZZ' ID 'SCRFNAME' FIELD SCREENNAME. IF sy-subrc = 0. You place the authority check object in authorization profile in the role of the users. who should have access to the field (in this case it is VBKD-ABSSC). the whole process.Modification group 1: Automatic modification with transaction MFAW Modification group 2: It contains 'LOO' for step loop fields Modification group 3: For modifications which depend on check tables or on other fixed information Modification group 4: is not used The FORM routine is called up for every field of a screen. else. endif. you must make them in this user exit. . With Compliments by: Taner Yuksel Actually suppressing fielding sales orders userwise is quite easy. and there assign the corresponding fields that are to be accessed via this userexit.

This is very commonly used. We use VA51 to create the item proposal. Difference between Item Proposal and Material Determination What is the difference between the item proposal and material determination product proposal? Item proposal and product proposal are the same. Then Create a Batch for the particular plant and Stor Loc using MSC1N. For this you need to maintain a Classes d for you Material. Depending on the Manufacturing process you can define the characteristics for your material. Here we get a number. Then in your material master Classification View Enter this class.Give the value of the characteristics in this batch. Material determination is very closely related to item proposal /product proposal and is used to swap one material for another in the sales order using the condition . Then go to SPRO ->Logistics General ->Batch Management and maintain the Condition Technique (Procedure. First Create the Characteristic Using Ct04 and then using Cl02 create the Class including this characteristic. You need to create a class (You might have to create a new class type) which incorporates the characteristic. Item proposal is the list of materials and order quantities that can be copied into the sales order from the customer master data.This number is then linked to the customer master data in the sales view. because at the time of order material may or may not be created. Resistance for Electric Items. Then Create the Batch Determination Record using VCH1. A2) Batch Determination during order Creation. Strategy Types and assignment to sales docs etc). Ex: Purity for Medicines.for this material should be configured with batch and batch determination should be checked in sales views of material.A1) Normaly we use batch determination at delivery level.

4) In [VA01] to create a sales order. 3) Enter the item proposal on the sales area data (sales tab) of the customer master record." SAP Tips by: Minmini Steps for SD Variant Configuration Some light on Variant Configuration in Detail.Zbike." 1) Use transaction [VOV8] to configure the document type ("MS" for product proposal). I have not seen Material determination procedures used in the projects I have worked. Blue etc . "An item proposal is a list of materials and order quantities that can be copied into the sales order. Select Edit & propose items. where in values mention the Color of the bile like Red. SAP Tips by: Prashanth Harish Item Proposal or Product proposal: "Item proposal is same as product proposal & SAP uses the two terms interchangeably. Material determination is useful when old product is becoming obsolete or a new product is released by the company at specific date." Material determination: "Material determination uses the condition technique to swap one material for another when certain conditions apply.KMAT type with Item category (002) Create Charateristics in CT04 . 2) Use transaction [VA51] to create a proposal. Material determination is triggered by the material entered in the line item of the sales order.technique. Items can also be selected from a list and copied into a sales order. The procedure is as follows: y y Create a Material . Use transaction [VB11] to create a material determination condition record. And [OV12] for configuration of material determination.

Select Procedure enter in front 10 write $self. *-.Editor .ZPrice='Blue' and save Now go back go to extras .What is class? . mouse etc). keyboard.ZPrice.ZBikeclass ( Type 300) in characteristics tab page.What is configuration profile? .Shaik Zaheeruddin the sales order.go to extras Other Dependencies .What is characteristic? .select Red.y y y y y y y y Create another characteristics in CT04 . monitor.Other Dependencies .What is a variant table? .enter Zbike -go to values. Now go back to CT04 .Other Dependencies .$self.go to extras .What is dependency and what are the types? .enter variant Red and Blue give the rates accordingly and create *-. Based on the values selected the variant pricing will happen using the condition type VA00.Other Dependencies . Tell me about variant configaration? What are the type of questions we can expect in that? Variant configuration is used where you have a configurable material like computer (made up of components like processor. where directly go the additional data tab and maintain the table SDCOM and field VKOND (ABAP Dictionary it will ask for) Assign these two characteristics to a Class in CL01 . Then go to CU41 Configuration profile select the material and enter the description click on the class assignment ie assign Zbikclass. Possible questions you can expect are: .assignments and assign relationship ( by default it will come just save) Now select Blue.What is value? . These components are called as characteristics in variant config. monitor can be 15" or 17" etc.assignments and assign relationship ( by default it will come just save) Now go to VK11 .And the transaction codes for the above.What is variant configuration? .Select Procedure enter in front of 10 write . Again this will be having values like processor can be either P4 or P3.Enter VA00 (Condition)(For Std RVA001 Pricing Procedure) .Balaji .ZPrice='Red' and save Now go back go to extras .

.. So choose a key that is unique. the system will throw a message that Interval already already exists..Number Ranges In Sales Order This is regarding number ranges defining and assigning tips which you can follow as below: Whenever there is a new Sales Org being created.Z*. Here ... . while proposing your key. Obviously. you should ensure that it should not be there in the system as existing. you are assigning a Key to a Number Range Series.M2.. BB. and which is not there in the system. In Standard SAP the Transaction code for Maintaiing Number ranges externally is VN01.The same can be reached through in IMG as : Sales & Distribution->Sales-->Sales Document Header-->Define Number Ranges for Sales Documents.. however it can be maintained externally also if you customize it accordingly.. If you propose a key that is there in the system or if the Number Range (Start and End Series) is there in the system already.. Number Ranges can be maintained Internally by the system. you will be required to maintain Number Ranges for Sales Documents which are allowed for your New Sales Area. *1 is a Unique Two digit Alphanumeric Key. ^A. by making this . Defining . All the symbols can be used along with numbers from 0 to 9 and Alphabets from A to Z and in any order. For example: !1. Here you provide the system a specific Number range as follows: Number range Key +Start Number range+ End Number Range+Current Number For Example: If you want to propose the following Number Range *1 9000076000 9000076999 0 The Current Number field will be kept zero as you are proposing new number range and no sales documents have been created on it .

The customer could return damaged goods. because the wrong scale prices were used or a discount was forgotten. Credit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a credit memo for a customer.In Assigning. A transaction that reduces Amounts Receivable from a customer is a credit memo."Number range External Assignment" Besides this: If a new Shipping Point is created then Delivery Number ranges are required to be maintained. A debit memo is a transaction that reduces Amounts Payable to a vendor because. for example. you send damaged goods back to your vendor. For eg.Assigning . you can remove the . you can create a credit memo request. and double click on it to display it configuration. Tips by : Vivek Sahni What is Debit note and Credit note What is Debit note and Credit note? What is the purpose? How we create? 1. If the price calculated for the customer is too high. If a new Plant is created then Billing Number Ranges are required to be maintained. The Assigning Part is done as follows: The Two digit Alpha Numeric Key is maintained or Assigned to the respective Sales Document type in V0V8. Similarly. 2. If the request is approved. This can also be reached in IMG by: Sales & Distribution-->Sales-->Sales Document Header-->Define Sales Document Types Locate the particular Sales Doc Type. Here you put the Two Digit Number key in the Field. you assign the particular Sales Document to the Number Range you have already proposed as above. The credit memo request is blocked for further processing so that it can be checked.

The system uses the debit memo request to create a debit memo. ± With reference to an invoice Here you enter which invoice the complaint refers to. the payment programme processes them automatically. 4. When it has been approved. You can create the debit or credit memo requests in the following ways: ± Without reference to an order ± With reference to an existing order Here you enter which order the complaint refers to. you specify the value or quantity that should be in the credit or debit . For credit memos. It is like a standard order. creating a credit or debit memo request enables you to create credit or debit memos based on a complaint. In all cases.Assignment to a single invoice . the payment program automatically attempts to offset the credit memo against the open item. calculated with the wrong scaled prices.Assignment of a partial amount to an invoice . Then you can apply a multilevel dunning program. you can post a debit memo to the vendor. The debit memo request can be blocked so that it can be checked. you can remove the block. If it is not possible to completely offset the credit memo against an invoice. If the credit memo is specifically related to a particular open invoice item. who is to reimburse the amount. you can create a debit memo request. credit memo requests. the assignment is no longer valid and the system will not process it. If you use both Financial Accounting (FI) and Sales and Distribution (SD). you have the following assignment options: . You can use credit memos in Sales and Distribution (SD) for assigning credit memo requests to the open invoices and in Financial Accounting (FI) for assigning credit memos and payments to the open invoices and carry out clearing with them. As soon as you bill the credit memo request together with other sales orders. If the prices calculated for the customer were too low.block. Debit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a debit memo for a customer. for example. or distribute the items of one credit memo request to several billing documents. The system uses the credit memo request to create a credit memo. 3.Assignment to several invoices When you post credit memos. there is a 1:1 relationship between the credit memo request and the credit memo item posted in Financial Accounting (FI). As mentioned above. and payments. For this first create a sales document with the order type for a credit or debit memo request.

The system uses the credit memo request to create a credit memo. you send damaged goods back to your vendor. credit memo requests. A debit memo is a transaction that reduces Amounts Payable to a vendor because. A transaction that reduces Amounts Receivable from a customer is a credit memo. the payment programmed processes them automatically. For credit memos. The request for a credit or debit memo can then be approved or rejected.if necessary. The customer could return damaged goods. You can block the credit or debit memo request from being billed in Customizing. you have the following assignment options: y y y Assignment to a single invoice Assignment of a partial amount to an invoice Assignment to several invoices When you post credit memos. or distribute the items of one credit memo request to several billing documents. If the price calculated for the customer is too high. Tips by : Rajendran Explain What Is Credit and Debit Memo 1. Credit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a credit memo for a customer. you can remove the block. The credit memo request is blocked for further processing so that it can be checked. for example. because the wrong scale prices were used or a discount was forgotten. If you use both Financial Accounting (FI) and Sales and Distribution (SD). by another department. Go to Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales document header -> Define sales document type and select the billing block field in the billing section. If the credit memo is specifically related to a particular open invoice . you can create a credit memo request. You can use credit memos in Sales and Distribution (SD) for assigning credit memo requests to the open invoices and in Financial Accounting (FI) for assigning credit memos and payments to the open invoices and carry out clearing with them. For eg. the assignment is no longer valid and the system will not process it. This request can later be reviewed along with similar ones. . and payments. If the request is approved. 2.memo 5. As soon as you bill the credit memo request together with other sales orders. there is a 1:1 relationship between the credit memo request and the credit memo item posted in Financial Accounting (FI).

Then you can apply a multilevel dunning program. y With reference to an invoice Here you enter which invoice the complaint refers to. you can remove the block. calculated with the wrong scaled prices. You can block the credit or debit memo request from being billed in Customizing. When it has been approved. Go to Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales document header -> Define sales document type and select the billing block field in the billing section. For this first create a sales document with the order type for a credit or debit memo request.item. This request can later be reviewed along with similar ones. .if necessary. The system uses the debit memo request to create a debit memo. creating a credit or debit memo request enables you to create credit or debit memos based on a complaint. you can post a debit memo to the vendor. It is like a standard order. Debit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a debit memo for a customer. by another department. for example. the payment program automatically attempts to offset the credit memo against the open item. 5. 4. If the prices calculated for the customer were too low. you specify the value or quantity that should be in the credit or debit memo. In all cases. The request for a credit or debit memo can then be approved or rejected. Use the same Invoice Script/smartform for Credit/debit memo's INVOICE Output type : RD00 ScriptForm Name : RVINVOICE01 . You can create the debit or credit memo requests in the following ways: y y Without reference to an order With reference to an existing order Here you enter which order the complaint refers to. If it is not possible to completely offset the credit memo against an invoice. 3. you can create a debit memo request. As mentioned above. The debit memo request can be blocked so that it can be checked. who is to reimburse the amount.

Internal customer should be assigned to the ordering plant ( MM -> Purchasing -> Purchase Order -> Setup stock transport order -> assign the internal customer to the ordering plant and assign the Sales area of the internal customer.Prassee Material should exist in both the plants (Delivering & Ordering). The Process is you create a STO do delivery against the STO and create a Billing Document against the STO.Driver Program Name : RVADIN01 smartform name : LB_BIL_INVOICE Smartform Driver Pgm: RLB_INVOICE Configure Intercompany Stock Transport Order Explain STO. Plant to plant transfer and even transferring raw material to Third party contractors (Job Work). Tcode : OMGN . How to configure the inter-company Stock Transport Order? . STO is Stock Transport order. It is used for inter company transfer of goods.

Create a puchase order ME21N ---> Save Delivery VL10 G ---> Calculation rule (appropriate) --> Assaign the purchase order number here and execute. The sales organization then invoices the customer for the materials purchased. The transaction path for accessing intercompany sales billing is: IMG >> Sales and distribution >> Billing >> Intercompany billing Let us take an example to understand intercompany sales better.Assign its Sales area to the delivering plant Assign the document type and Delivery type NB and NLCC Assign the Supplying plant --> Receiving Plant --> NB Take the delivering plant and assign the sales area. Select the Delivery creation line and do the back ground process. Vendor master has to be created and assaign the supply source ( Delivering Plant). SAP R/3 automatically creates an intercompany billing document at the same time as the customer¶s billing . Inter Company Sales Process Explain the Inter Company Sales Process. A customer may place an order for goods in sales organization belonging to company code 3000. Billing (Intercompany pricing conditions should be set). However. In SAP sales & distribution module. A sales order is created indicating delivering plant of company code 1000. Start the log display and see the delivery document number by the documents button Goto VL02N --> do picking and PGI --> Then do the MIGO with respect to the delivery document. an intercompany sales occurs when the selling organization belongs to a different company code than the delivering plant. the goods may be manufactured by a delivering plant belonging the company code 1000. Suppose there are two company codes namely 1000 and 2000.

Now Plant . --In inter. one may find a need to transfer stock between two different company codes. if the end user knows there is no stock on their plant. But in case the stock is transferred between different company codes. if the stock be transferred within the same company code. a transfer of value occurs and is an intercompany sale. . that¶s the reason you enter delivering plant while creating sales order.Assign the Plant-D to selling sales org+ dbt channel. . .company sales process.R (Receiving) become the customer of Plant-D. .Maintain the intercomapny billing type (IV) in ur sales doc type (OR). As a rule of thumb. Below is the inter-company check list: Check all your settings once again for creating inter-company billing: . So create a dummy customer in Plant-D's company code and sales area.Maintain relevant copy controls between documents. .document is created. IV doc's DPP along with Delivering plant's sales area) .Assign this customer number to Plant -R's details & its selling sales area.Determine pricing procedure for Standard (RVAA01) as well as Intercompany (ICAA01) (Note: Dummy customer's CPP. However.Stock will be maintained in D-Plant (Delivering). after delivery they will receive intercompany invoice from the delivering company code. no PO will raise. . . This intercompany invoice is sent from the delivering plant to the selling sales organization. there is no need for an intercompany transaction. when dealing with different company codes. they request for their sister concern company to deliver these ordered goods to the customer directly. While creating sales order.Material should exist in both plants.

observe bill type-F2. . through which the condition record of PI01 is shared to IV01 also. such as Inquiry.Maintain the condition records for Condition type PI01.Create Billing VF01 (with ref to DEL again)--observe the bill type-IV. etc. 2. 3. .) . with ref to SO. Combine sales organizations / Combine distribution channels / Combine divisions: Ensure to maintain these. Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas: Assign only required Sales Order Types to required Sales Area. in delivering plant -enter Plant-D. . and save. Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents: Maintain number range with discussion with core team. Sales Order. else Sales Order creation will give error.Now create VA01. @ item level as well as @ header level. If possible use standard sales order. To create new sales order type.. it has the ref Ctype as "PI01" .Create Billing VF01 (with ref to DEL)--. you won't find any PI01 Ctype. B. . always copy as with reference to similar sales order.VK11 (Note: In ICAA01.type in V/06. Quotation. This will minimize selection of Sales Order Type as per sales area..Create Delivery VL01n. if you observe the details of IV01 C. Normal Sales Order Cycle Configuration What are those initial sales order config? By: Anuradha Normal Sales Order Cycle:Step 1: Sales Document Type IMG > Sales and Distribution > Sales > Sales Documents > Sales Document Header: 1. but you'll find IV01-. Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types: A. enter the required fields. Sales Document Type: The sales document types represent the different business transactions.

Define Delivery Types: If possible use Standard Delivery Type. Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents: Maintain relevant copy controls such as Sales Order to Billing. 3. copy as from standard & maintain New. use standard. Define Item Categories for Deliveries: If possible use Standard Item Categories for Delivery Type. Incase if required to create new. Define Item Categories: If possible use Standard Item Category. Define Schedule Line Categories: If possible use Standard Schedule Lines. Incase if required to create new. 2. copy as from standard & maintain New. Step 3: IMG > Sales and Distribution > Billing > 1. Incase if required to create new. The configuration differs from scenario to scenario & requirement of the client. Incase if required to create new. copy as from standard & maintain New. Formula for deriving Schedule Line: Item Category + MRP Type / No MRP Type. Default Storage Location In Sales Order Where to maintain settings if we want to make storage location appear by default at the time of creating the sales order? . use standard. Formula for deriving item category: Sales Document Type + Item Category Group + Usage + Higher Level Item Category = Item Category Schedule Line: 1. Define Number Range For Billing Documents: Ensure to maintain number range. 2. etc. Define Number Ranges for Deliveries: Ensure to maintain number range.Sales Document Item: 1. 3. Deliver to Billing. Incase if required to create new. 2. Assign Item Categories: If possible. Step 2: IMG > Logistic Execution > Shipping > Deliveries > 1. 2. copy as from standard & maintain New. Define Billing Types: If possible use Standard Billing Type. copy as from standard & maintain New. Assign Schedule Line Categories: If possible.

RETA.. If no storage location for picking is specified in the order item. If you want the system to check the stock at a specific storage location.to default in Header.There is No storage location determination at Sales order level. the system determines the storage location when it creates the outbound delivery and copies it into the delivery item. The system determines the picking location based on a MALA. You cannot configure storage location into sales order: you need to use user exit MV45AFZB USEREXIT_SOURCE_DETERMIN or You can use userexit_save_document Userexit_save_document_prepare or The relevant forms to be used are: USEREXIT_MOVE_FIELD_TO_VBAK -. User exit: MV45AFZZ --- . Only we can enter manually. Storage loction determination in Sales order is only possible via a user exit. You have to create a Z-table and maintain the table with data under which that specific storage location has to be determined.. A userexit has to be used so that it will default the appropriate storage location after checking the table. MARA rule defined in the delivery type. Storage location will be determined at Delivery level only.to default in item. USEREXIT_MOVE_FIELD_TO_VBAP -. System does not determine storage location at sales order level. User has to indicate it at time of creating sales order. the storage location has to be entered manually at item level or you have to go for development so that it will be defaulted under the specific conditions specified. The storage location entered in the order item is copied into the outbound delivery. This functionality is not available in the standard SAP.

an accounting document is created and the status is "not cleared". . Billing document : when billing document is created and saved. it is partially delivered. (double click on item and at item level chk the status) or check in transaction VA05 all the open orders. the status of the delivery becomes "complete". i. only 50 are being delivered till its delivery date .Standard SAP can't determine storage location at sales order level. If required to give manually. once payment is posted with reference to this accounting document. the status becomes complete only when billing is done. 3. Open Sales order : I will explain taking an example. the document flow will summarize the status of each document. because it is not fully delivered. then its status will be open . the status of billing becomes "complete" as well. You can check the open order status in VA02 in status tab. In SAP SD. suppose there is an order for 100 qty and against this order. you look at table BSEG. But at deliver it'll determine automatic. Do the proper settings at Delivery level: SPRO --> LOGISTICS EXECUTION --> SHIPPING --> PICKING --> DETERMINE PICKING LOCATION --> Define Rules for Picking Location Determination. 2. If sales order level by default require. then you have to use user EXIT. Explain The Meaning Of An Open Sales Order What is an open sales order? An open sales order is where the order has not been delivered (physical goods). the status remains at "being processed". and posted to accounting. they are: 1. the status becomes "cleared". Sales order : once delivery has been created. In order. Outbound delivery : when items are picked and posted for goods issue. Payments posting affects the status of the accounting document. the status of the order changes from "open" to "completed". 4. hence.e.

system giving default sold to party. that sales order will be considered as complete order.Enter your doc no. How to close any open sales order? Go to transaction VA05. here you can see list of all Sales order open for any particular sales area. You can either do mass maintenance to close all the open order by giving rejection reason.How can we know using data in tables whether a sales order is open or not? Check in Transaction VA05 and in table the status filed will tell you the status of open order.in the menu bar go to sales document-then DELETE. Sold To Party In Sales Order Screen After entering sales order (va01) screen. Now select the line item and assign Reason for Rejection which you will find on the right top side. input the sale order and execute. Or you can check one by one order & reject the pending item. Go to VA02. then you can delete the sales order from the tcode VA02 . Can you tell if a sales order can be considered open if delivery has happened but payment has not been done yet? Yes. not open order. Delivery will be open against which billing is not happened. Table VBAP / VBAK / VBUK (header) and VBUP (item) Which table is updated when customer pays against an invoice? Check table VBAK / VBAP / VBRK / VBRP and VBFA you can chk the document flow. How to disable this? . If you have not delivered any quantity.

This is due to activation of userexit V45A0002. You need to deactivate this. Take the help from ABAPer to find the project which is assigned to the userexit and deactivate the same. or Can you also check in your SU3 Parameters whether there is any entry with Parameter ID - VAU? If some value is set for this parameter , it will be copied by default in SOLD-TOPARTY during creation of the Sales Document (VA01) You can remove this ID or clear the Value. You can also check if there is any Transaction Variant associated with your Transaction in SHD0 through which the default sold-to-party can come. --Change sold to party in sales order We have the below requirement of changing sold to party after creation of sales order: Once sales order is created, purchase requisition is created automatically and purchase order is created with reference to the purchase requisition. So when Goods receipt is done, the respective stock is getting reserved for that sales order. We wanted to change the sold to party option. After creation of purchase order, sold to party option in sales order is display only. How to make it changeable? As long as you have not created subsequent document like delivery or invoice, you can change the sold to party in sale order either in creation mode (VA01) or in change mode (VA02). But once you created the subsequent document, you cannot change the sold to party bocz, the said field will become uneditable. --Effect of sold to party in sales order

What is the effect of sold to party in sales order? Suppose we are creating the sales order with customer '11' and material 'abc', but before saving the sales order document we changed the customer and new customer is '21', so after this change which is redetermined in the sales order. These will get redetermine -->Tax -->Price -->Frieght -->Payment terms -->Shipping conditions -->Partner (Ship to party, bill to party and Payer). -->Route. If the Sold to party is changed from 11 to 21, then the new SP (21) may be valid for some other Sales Area, may have different SH,PY &BP. So accordingly those data will change. If different SP, then Price may vary, Shipping condition may vary. So those data may change. As different SH may be different, then Route may be different, Plant may be different, and as Tax is mostly Plant dependent, so Tax may change. If SP is different PY may be different, so Payment Term, Incoterm & Credit limit may be different, so those data will be changed/redetermined accordingly.

Profit Center Default In Sales Order
Question: In sales order we have profit center tab in line item --> account assignment. From where does this profit center comes here? The source I mean. Answer:

Sales order takes profit center from material master view Sales: Plant/General data. Profit center is assigned in (material master record) MMR in sales orgn 2 view. If you assign there automatically it will trigger in the sales order. In the item data -> account assignment tab . This profit center is used in MMR because, once you do OR- LF- F2 for that material this material value has to trigger in the profit center in FI properly. After doing F2 and when you save a the Invoice i.e., F2, automatically an accounting document gets generated along with a profit center document also gets generated if you have assigned profit center to your MMR. In material master, I was created profit center PBB2K for part A but it is showing different profit center when sales order created. Advise why different profit center show in sales order? Check 0KEM for any sales order substitution for profit center. In general, the material master profit center defaults to profit center, but at sales order you can change the profit center otherwise check 0KEM It seems as though we have a FI setup in our system through which the Profit Center on the Sales Order is NOT defaulted from the Material master, but is showing up another value, could you please provide me the steps where I could look that up? What configuration is it from the FI side that is preventing the standard material PC to be over ridden? Please check OKB9, or Simple, It is in substitution, Go to transaction GGB1 and see under the node profit center accounting. You will see that you can substitute the profit center in the sales order using substitution.

You can define your own here. How can I make the Field Profit Center in the line item level of the sales order to mandatory? You can do this by transaction variant. Goto tcode SHD0, give t code as VA01. Make a transaction variant and make the fields mandatory. or Please include the Field Profit Center (PRCTR) in incompletion Procedure of Sales Order Item. So without Profit Center Entry Sales Order will be incomplete. Goto T.code OVA2 copy the procedure you are now working with and add the field vbap-Prctr. In VUP2 you can assign your new procedure to your item category.

Check Whether The Entries Is Maintain in LIS Update or Not
Path: SPRO --> IMG --> Logistics-General -->Logistics Information System --> Logistics Data Warehouse --> Updating --> Updating Control --> Settings: Sales --> Update Group --> Assign Update Group at Header Level Maintain following data, separately in two rows: Sales Org: say,1234 DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Statistics group for sales document type: 1 and Sales Org: DstCh:

Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Statistics group for sales document type: 2 SPRO --> IMG --> Logistics-General -->Logistics Information System --> Logistics Data Warehouse --> Updating --> Updating Control --> Settings: Sales --> Update Group --> Assign Update Group at Item Level Maintain following data, separately in two rows: Sales Org: DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Material Statistic Group: 1 Statistics group for sales document type: 1 Statistics group for the item category: 1 and Sales Org: DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Material Statistic Group: 1 Statistics group for sales document type: 2 Statistics group for the item category: 2 Note: Once, you will maintain Settings for LIS-Update, it will update onwards transactions and will not update for already done transactions.

3PL Purchase Order Link To Sales Order
For third party order, either you can create the material master with item category group as BANS, so the system will automatically pick TAS in the sales order for the material or you can change the item category manually to TAS in the order. This will trigger a PR, based on the PR a PO will be generated. Defining Item Category Group

. Blank Rounding permitted Blank Order qty = 1 Blank Incomplete proced.relevant X Credit active X Determine cost X Aut. start date Blank Business data item X Sched. variant action Blank ATP material variant Blank Structure scope Blank Application Blank Value contract material Blank . status group 1 Screen seq. Blank Config. for delivery Blank Returns Blank Weight/Vol. strategy Blank Mat. 28 PartnerDetermProced T TextDetermProcedure 01 Item cat. batch determ. line allowed X Item relev.IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item > Define Item category groups Defining Item Category -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item -> Define Item Categories Item category TAS Description 3rd party with SN CM Item type Blank Completion rule Blank Special stock Blank Relevant for billing B Billing plan type Blank Billing block Blank Pricing X Statistical value Blank Revenue recognition Blank Delimit. group N Status profile Blank Create PO autom.

Contract release ctrl Blank Repair procedure Blank Billing form Blank DIP profile Blank Assigning Item Category IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item > Assign Item categories Creating Material MM01 1. On the screen Create Material (Initial Screen) enter the material number if External. 2. Choose Select View(s). (Basic View 1&2, Sales Views, Purchasing views and accounting views). 3. Enter the relevant data and save the material. Use material group BANS in the item material group field. Creating SD Pricing Conditions for material VK11 Creating Vendor Master XK01

What is the Foreign trade data required in SO for doing Exports
I am doing export sale but while creating billing document system give error that "Missing export data" hence accounting document has not created. Trouble Shooting and Problem Solving : Go to VF02, input the billing document and execute. From top menu bar, click on "Goto -- Header -- Foreign Trade/Customs".

There again click on "Incompleteness analysis" which will be below to "Head.text" tab so that it will take you to the areas where you need to fill in the required datas. Once you gave all the data and save, you can check the log as "Document complete". Solution : This will resolve the issue for current Invoice; but if the same error is occurring for every Invoice, maintain default values. To get the default values for foreign trade data go to 1. IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Foreign Trade/Customs --> Basic data for foreign trade --> Define Business Transaction Types And Default Value --> Define Default Business Type (SD) In this step maintain assignments for country/sales org/dist channel / item category / and transaction type combination. 2. IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Foreign Trade/Customs --> Basic data for foreign trade --> Define Procedures and Default Value --> Define procedure default In this step maintain assignments with the combination of country/sales org/dist channel/division/exp.imp group/item category/ procedure. Apart from the above we need to maintain Comm./imp. code no./country of origin and region of origin at material master HINT: Go to VTFL, select your billing type and delivery type and click on blue magnifying lens on top left so that it will take you to a screen where most probably, you would be maintaining "B" for "Determ.export data". Maintain blank field there and save. Now system will not throw incomplete error message.

Material To Be Added or Excluded To a Customer
How to setup material exclusion for customer during sales order creation? If you want specific material to be added or excluded to a customer, you can do it in "Listing and Exclusion".

Here is a small note on listing and exclusion, it may be helpful. Material listing and exclusion: Material listing: Whatever the materials that are placed in the listing for a customer he can access to those materials only. Maintaining records for material listing: Logistics Sales and distribution Master data Products Listing/Exclusion VB01 Create Specify the condition type for listing Select the required key combination Enter the required materials in listing and save it. Material Exclusion: Whatever the materials that are placed in exclusion for a customer he cannot access those materials. Maintaining records for material Exclusion: Logistics Sales and distribution Master data Products Listing/Exclusion VB01 Create Specify the condition type for exclusion Select the required key combination Enter the required materials in exclusion and save it. Maintaining condition technique for listing and exclusion: SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Listing/Exclusion

Maintain condition tables for listing/exclusion Maintain access sequence for listing/exclusion Maintain listing/exclusion types Go to new entries and define condition types one each for listing, exclusion Procedure for maintaining listing/exclusion Define the procedure one each for listing and exclusion Activate listing/exclusion by sales document type Select the required sales document type and assign the procedure for listing and exclusion Note: 1. Listing type A001 2. Exclusion type B001 3. Procedure for listing A00001 4. Procedure for exclusion B00001

Sales Order Number Blank In MD04
I have a sales order which is complete in all respects. The sales order appears in MD04 with correct date and quantity. However MD04 does not show the sales order number. (number is blank) Delivery can be created from this sales order. This delivery is seen in MD04 with correct date and quantity, but the delivery number is not shown in MD04. Delivery is successfully PGI'ed subsequently. Why the numbers that are saved in SD not shown in MD04? Solution: Check in Material Master - MRP3 View. Availability Check might be maintained as "01" - Daily requirement. If is, then the sales order number will not appear in MD04 list. SO number will appear for 02- Individual requirement. Fyi:

Once sales order is created - it will be appear in MD04, once delivery is created wrt: SO ( w/o PGI), then delivery number will appear, SO number will not appear. Once PGI is done against to this delivery document. Then the line item from MD04 will be deleted. To recovery / delete the inconsistent entries, you can run the prog: SDRQCR21 It makes sense as well that for 01, the orders on the same day are summarized. Your understanding is perfectly right. This is the reason, why you can't see the SO number in MD04 for Materials which has AC:01. In MD04- line appears as summarized requirement for the whole day, it could consist all the SO numbers on that day. So you can¶t see the SO number in this case. To check the Availability Check rules for existing sales order (VBBE), do the following: 1. Go to the sales order. 2. Select particular line item. 3. Click on Display availability button at the bottom 4. You shall get the availability screen. 5. ON the top , click on SCOPE OF CHECK 6. You shall see that on top left section, there are two fields A) Availability Check ( eg 01, 02 etc) B) Checking rule ( A , B etc ) Your focus should be on Availability Check. If it is 02, it indicates Individual Requirement. If your availability check option is 01, it means table VBBS shall be updated with Daily ( total records / requirements )

Availability Check had been changed to "02". New sales order or new item line in the same sales order with the materials will work after MM .MRP View 3 . it will still shows blank as the system only copied the MRP Settings once. Partner Determination For Sales Doc Explain me how to get partner determination for sales doc header level. then ideally table VBBE should have been updated for that sales order PS: For existing sales order that were already created. Define partner determination procedure: IMG -> SD -> Basic Functions -> Partner Determination -> Setup Partner Determination -> Partner Determination For Sales Doc Header Click on Partner Type Go To New Entries and Define Partner Types Customer KU Vendor LI Contact Person AP Sales Employ SE Select Partner Type KU and Go To Details Icon and Maintain Partner Functions SP Sold To Party SH Ship To Party BP Bill To Party PY Payer Come Back and Click On Assign Partner Type To Sales Doc Header KU To TA Assign Partner Functions To Account Group .If your availability check option is 02. By: Micro Irrigation First determine one account group ( Trans code OBD2 ) assign number range for acct group ( Trans code OBAR ).

Delivery. Setup Partner Determination Procedure How to customize the Partner Determination Procedure? We can determine partner determination procedure by using the transaction code VOPA. In the business one specifies partner is authorized to enter and to release contracts. 2) Vendor(LI) Partner Functions (FA. A) Partner Types. Depending on the partner type every partner fulfill certain mandatory partner functions. Py. For Sales Doc Header The Partner Functions Can Be Determined From Customer Master. Sh. Bp. SAP determines relevant partner functions automatically to relevant partner object type. . Flow: Customer master. 1) Customer(KU) He performs partner functions like Sp. Sales. Document header and items. 4) Sales Employee(PE) Partner Funcitons-SE Authorized Partner to release the order Contracts are release by raising sales orders. In the business different people interacts to make a transaction with the business while making transactions with the business every partner performs certain roles those are called as a partner functions.SP To ACC GROUP SH BP PY Same.Forward Agent). Billing. 3) Contact Person (AP) Partner Functions-CP.

a) Define Partner functions to sales document header .At Header level( sales document) there is a control by which system carries out checks against partner whether he is authorized to release the contract. For sales document. kb.Sold T party) to release the contracts. e) Assign partner functions to account group. d) Assign partner determination determination procedure to account group. Partner type(KU) and Partner Functions( AA. Click on partner function control button under dialog structure Partner Function Name Partner type error sp sold to party ku 07 sh ship to party ku 07 bp bill to party ku 07 py payer ku 07 partner type Pe Km credit manager pe kb credit represent pe 09 09 b) Define partner determination procedure.credit representations both belongs to partner type pe(personal) Configurations settings: 1) Define Account Group( OBD2) 2) Assign Number range key to Account Group (OBAR) 3) Define partner determination procedure for customer master. Aw. a) Define partner functions Path: Img -> sd -> basic functions -> partner determination -> set up partner determination -> set up partner determination for customer master. c) Assign partner functions to partner determination procedure. Partners to check credit limits: We define partner functions Km-credit Manager.ship to party to release the contracts and this partner functions assigned to partner determination procedure (kab).

This means that the components only function as text items and are not relevant for delivery. The individual components are displayed as lower-level items. the system displays the material that describes the whole bill of materials as a main item. Processing at Main Item Level If you want the system to carry out pricing.Component level if the material is not assembled The type of processing used by the system is determined by the item category group that you enter in the material master record for relevant materials. inventory control. Sales BOM Implementation A bill of material (BOM) describes the different components that together create a product. wheels. The following graphic shows how a bill of material is processed at main item level. Once you have entered a bill of material in a sales order. the system runs pricing. . or .1) Define partner functions img -> sd -> basic functions -> partner determination -> setup partner determination > set up partner determination for sales document header 2) Define partner determination procedure. 2 screen in the material master record of the finished product.Main item level if the material is assembled. consists of all the parts that make up the bicycle: the frame. Process Flow When you enter the material number of a bill of materials that is relevant for sales order processing. and delivery processing at main item level. inventory control. 3) Assign partner functions to partner determination procedure 4) Partner Determination procedure assignment. enter ERLA in the Item category group field of theSales: sales org. and delivery processing at: . for example. There are two ways to process a bill of materials in Sales. A BOM for a bicycle. the saddle. and so on.

what's the 'Structure scope' set as? Anything except C may be useful here? We have that set to A. Has the BOM itself been configured properly (i. How to Know that Sales BOM is working or not? I have set up a sales BOM. and delivery processing at the component level. Are you trying it out on an order created after all BOM maintenance was done? 7.has BOM application SD01 been assigned to it? 3. In this case. The bom hasn't been defined for the plant used. If it doesn't then your BOM isn't working. You could set it to B if BOM are configured multi-level. How do I know or test that is is working or not? Once you enter a material (for whch you have created a BOM thru CS01) in the sales doc another material pops under the main material line item as a sub-item (s). Main item category .the truth is out there somwhere. Item categories for main items and sub-items have not been mainteined properly. 4. inventory control. Fast Links: . just recheck your whole config . A number of things to check is: 1. 5. only the components are relevant for delivery. The latest delivery date among all the components becomes the delivery date for the entire delivery group. Those are probably main reasons why BOM shouldn't work. enter LUMF in the Item category group field of theSales: sales org. Sales items maintenance . During processing the system automatically creates a delivery group. BOM usage '5')? 6. right plant.Processing at Component Level If you want the system to carry out pricing. In my experience BOMs work if all maintenance has been done properly.You should assign item categories for BOM header items and sub-items to a specific sales doc.e. since our BOMs are all single-level. Also . or you haven't defined the plant in SO. 2. Apart from that. 2 screen in the material master record of the finished product.

Material BOM CS01 create Specify the data for the following fields.Sales and distribution .Products .Bills of material .Master data . 1) For the BOM to be exploded in the sales document the following customizing setting is required. Plant: Specify the plant of BOM item. (L = stock item N = Non-stock item) In the overview screen specify the components which makes the main item and the corresponding quantities and save it. Creating BOM item: .What Is BOM Referring to SAP SD What is bill of material? By: Mike BILL OF MATERIALS We need to maintain Material master records for the BOM Item and for the components also. Material: Specify the material for which components are to be maintained.Logistics . The item category group of the BOM items is µERLA/LUMF¶ and the item category is µNORM¶. BOM usage: Specify the application in which BOM is maintained (5 for SD). Note: During sales document processing if we enter the BOM item the system automatically determines corresponding components. Alternative BOM: Specifies the sequence of a BOM within a group of BOMs. .

B) The item category of the components is TAN which is relevant for pricing. in the definition of which we have to specify the value A (Explode single level BOM) in the structure scope. For this following customizing setting is required. A) The item category of BOM item is TAQ. A) The item category of the BOM item is TAP which is not relevant for pricing. so the BOM is priced. so the components are not priced. B) The item category of components is TAE which is not relevant for pricing. so the components are priced 3) If the item category group is ERLA the system shows price for the BOM item but not for components. For this the following customizing setting is required. which is relevant for pricing. 2) If the item category group is LUMF the system shows price for the components but not for the BOM item.A) If the item category group is ERLA the item category of the BOM is TAQ. While creating sales document to get the list of alternative BOMs in the definition item category of BOM item we have to check the field ³Manual Alternative´ 24-07-2007 ITEM CATEGORY DETERMINATION FOR BOM ITEM SD type OR OR OR OR OR OR OR NOTE: ITCaGr ERLA NORM LUMF NORM NORM NORM NORM Usg HLItCa TAQ TAE TAP TAN TAN TAE TAE DftItCa TAQ TAP TAE TAN A ± Explode single level BOM item B ± Explode multi level BOM item . so the BOM item is not Priced. B) If the item category group is LUMF the item category of the BOM item is TAP in the definition of which we have to specify the value A in the field structure scope.

and price it at header level or sub level. For eg. and all the assemblies are called as the sub items. If you want to assemble the products and depending upon the assemblies you want to price. if the customer asks for a certain combinationa of Material A. just give the Material D and the system will pick up the corresponding assemblies for that material and populate in the order. This type of configaration of BOM is known as pricing at item level. then you create a Material Master record Material D with item category group as LUMF. and C and give their respective quantities. Then configure the item categories ( T . ricing Customization For Sales BOM What are the steps of customization to pricing for header level or item level then? By: John You can create a sales bom. B and C are created with standared item category groups NORM only. The item category for the header item will be TAP and the item cateory for the items will be TAN. It just acts as a text item. B and C respectively. B. . and C. Before you have to create pricing condition records for Materials A.CS01 ± Transaction code for creating BOM Item Statistical value µx¶ or µy¶ Make TAP relevant for pricing but values for statistical only. Here the subitems are relevant for pricing and delivery where as the header item is not relevant for neither pricing nor delivery. BOM Usage : 5 (Sales and Distribution) then give the Materials A. This is used when you dont know what quantities of assemblies the customer is going to order and if the price of the assembly keeps varies. B.code : VOV4). In this cas the Material D is called as the higher level Item . Then create a sales BOM using Tcode CS01 and enter the following details: Material : Material D Plant : Plant in which you created the material. While the Materials A. When processing the sales order.

-->If you want pricing at item level you create header material with LUMF Itemcategory group. The difference is that the Material Master D has to be confugured using the item category group ERLA. In Summary: -->Befor going to create sales BOM you need to create: Master data for that Header Material and Components in the MM01 transaction. -->To create Sales BOM go to the transaction CS01 there you give enter the data Header Material which you have created in the MM01 transaction. and subitems are not relevant for neither the pricing nor the delivery. -->Now you can create sales order with the BOM material . -->If you want Header price you create Header Materil with ERLA Itemcategory group. Depending upon your requirement you configure accordingly.There is another way of configaring BOM which is pricing at header level. But you need to maintain the pricing condition record for the header item. The item categories in this case would be Header item : TAQ Sub item TAE. -->Maintain the Pricing procedure according to that. BOM Usage as '5' (Sales and Distribution) ***Then proceed with enter system will take you the BOM detail screen here you maintain the details of the components (How many components you need to make a Header material) -->Check the item category determinetion settings in the transaction VOV4. Delivering Plant. Creation of BOM is same. Where the header item is relevant for pricing and delivery.

therefore. A sale order is created and when saved a PR is generated at the background 5. Goods receipt MIGO 8.Process Flow for 3rd Party Sales Customize the third party sales in summary: 1. MM receives the invoice MIRO 7. 3. div Enter Sold to PO # Material Quantity Enter Save . Vendor delivers the goods and raises bill to company. Create Material ± Material Type as "Trading Goods". Item category group as "BANS". The company raises PO to the vendor. Assign Item Category TAS to Order type that you are going to use.3rd party sales order Create Sales Order VA01 Order Type Sales org. distr chnl. 10. 6. Goods issue 9.Seema Dhar SD . 4. With reference to SO a PO is created (ME21N). Billing *-. there is no delivery process attached in the whole process of Third party sales. The item cat TAS or Schedule line cat CS is not relevant for delivery which is evident from the config and. Create Vendor XK01 2.

3rd party sales order Create Invoice MIRO Invoice Date Look for the PO . state the vendor and the Material Check the box . click on classification Serial Numbers tab Date of Production Flag Item OK Check. enter Drag the PR and drop in the shopping basket Save SD .3rd party sales order View the PR that is created with a third party sales order VA01 Order Number Goto Item Overview Item ->Schedule Item SD . just in case Post Save SD .3rd party sales order Assign the PR to the vendor and create PO ME57 Key in the PR number Toggle the "Assigned Purchase Requisition" Execute Check the box next to the material Assign Automatically button Click on "Assignments" button Click on "Process assignment" The "Process Assignment Create PO" box .3rd party sales order View the PR that is created ME52N Key in the PR number Save SD .SD .3rd party sales order Receive Goods MIGO_GR PO Number DN Number Batch tab .

Ex: If the customer placed for the order for computer then computer stand can be suggested as a combination material. (3) Menu of path of subsequent Delivery Free of Charge. (2) While creating individual order I face one error 'Plant not assigned to Controlling Area': How to configure controlling area and menu path.Clilck on "Copy" Purchase Order Number (bottom half of the screen) Amount State the baseline date Simulate & Post Invoice Number *Invoice blocked due to date variance SD .3rd party sales order Create a delivery order VL01N In the order screen . go to the menu Sales Document . select "Deliver" Go to "picking" tab State the qty and save SD . It can be mapped by using cross selling concept that uses condition technique.3rd party sales order Create a billing document VF01 Ensure that the delivery document is correct in the Enter Go to edit -> Log Save Cross Selling : How To Configure (1) Cross Selling: How to configure and the menu path details. By : Ahmednsp Cross selling is a concept by which the business can improve the sales. By using this concept the business can offer combination material for ordered material. When the user raises the sales order and specifies ordered material then system automatically pup-up a box in which system displays suggested material Configuration settings: .

Assign the pricing procedure (RVA001) .Specify cross selling dialog box indicator W . c) Define condition type: Here we define condition type C001 and assign it to access sequence C001 that we define in previous step.Basic function .1) Define determination procedure for cross selling: Path: .Define determination procedure for cross selling a) Create condition table: Here we define condition table ex: .Specify cross selling pricing procedure (CS0001) .cross selling b) Define documents procedure for cross selling: Here we define document cross selling procedure ex: `B".SD .material b) Maintain access sequence: Here we define access sequence ex: C001 and assign condition table ex:011 that we define in previous step. 2) Maintain customer/document procedures for cross selling: a) Define customer procedure for cross selling: Here we define customer cross selling profile Ex: "B" -. d) Maintain procedure: Go to new entries and define cross selling profile Ex: CS0001 and assign our condition type C001 that we define in the previous step.Cross selling . specify cross selling profile key with description .cross selling c) Assign document procedure for cross selling to sales document: Choose sales document type "OR" and assign document cross selling procedure ex: "B" 3) Define and assign cross selling profile: a) Define cross selling profile: Go to new entries.IMG .

system carry out ATP check for cross selling product. It is blank ± dialog box appears in request and after date is released Check cross selling ATP indicator: If you check it .B Save it and exit Go to VA01.SD .Products . raise the sales order with order material check the effect.Master data . 4) Path to created controlling area: Img-->Ent Str-->Defintio-->Controlling-->Maintain Controlling Area .If it is "A" ± dialog box appears only in request.CS0001 Maintain condition record for cross selling (VB41): Path: . sales area section of sales tab Assign customer procedure for product proposal . specify sales area . here you can create controlling area An Example Of Third Party Sales .Assign cross selling profile -.VB41 Specify condition type C001 Specify the order material. select condition line item Click on alternative material icon and maintain alternative material with cross selling delivery conditions options Blank ± Out bond delivery takes place regardless of main item "A" -. b) Assign cross selling profile: .Specify document cross selling procedure ± B .Cross selling .Specify customer cross selling procedure ±B .Out bond delivery only if main item has been partially delivered Go to VD02.Logistics .Go to new entries.

4) Indian company sends the invoice to the singapore company. 2) If you are not always allowing third party order processing then you can create a material master record with item category group as NORM and the procurement type should be marked as (X) meaning both types of procurement (in house manufacturing . This is converted into PO (purchase order) and sent to the indan company. This triggers the automatic creation of the PR. Singapore is not able to produce the same. item category & schedule line category. The schedule line category is CS. Final Commercial Invoice will be raised by Singapore. Here you can see a field 'order type' with value 'NB'. Plus in the material master also you need to do certain settings. In standard SAP. They pass on the order to India for processing. 3) Indian company supplies the material directly to the singapore customer. Invoice copy is passed on to Singapore. item category TAS is used for this. The procurement type should be marked as external procurement (F) in MRP 2 view of the material master record. How can the above scenario handled? By: Balaji You can do this using third party sales. After processing India ships the material directly to the customer along with necessary documentation. 2) Because of the configuration settings of the sales document type.Scenario: 2 companies are created in system . as soon as the order is saved a PR (purchase requisition) is automatically generated. 1) Singapore company creates an order for the singapore customer.India & Singapore Customer places sales order for particular material on Singapore. 5) Singapore company does the invoice verification in MM using tcode MIRO. 1) If you are always following a third party process for a material then you have to create the material using item category group BANS. The third party sales process is as under. 6) Singapore company raises the invoice to the singapore customer.

and external procurement). In addition to the above information structures. But it is not showing all the invoices which I done in a day. It shows only a latest created invoice details. the standard shipment also includes information structures that are used internally (S066/67 Credit Management. In the item category the billing relevance should be 'F'. S060 rebate processing and S009/14 sales support). I am trying to see the standard analysis for the customer in MCTA transaction. the following information structures are available in the Sales Information System: y y y y y y S001 "Customer" S002 "Sales office" S003 "Sales organization" S004 "Material" S005 "Shipping point" S006 "Sales employee " These information structures form the data basis for the respective standard analysis of the same name. What is the Difference/Similarities between LIS and SIS The Logistics Information System (LIS) is made up of the following information systems: y y y y y y y y Sales Information System Purchasing Information System Inventory Controlling Shop Floor Information System Plant Maintenance Information System Quality Management Information System Retail Information System (RIS) Transport Information System (TIS) Out of this SIS (sales information system ) is one. . In the standard system.

and subtract sales orders. SAP will then forward schedule for today¶s date. different planned orders. MRP looks at the demand on the plant. If the date it calculates is equal or later than today¶s date. as well as credit checks. as it is not a definite order.S999 in the customer namespace then MCSI to execute any custom reports. MRP works semi-separately. deliveries etc already created against that material in that plant (and possibly Storage location). Create new invoices and run MCTA again. depending upon how PP and MRP is set up. less transportation lead time. ATP is the single most complex part of the SD module. depending on how it is set up. less pick and pack time.MCTA is reading data in table S001. Use S600 . the first availability check is carried out. If it falls in the past. plus the times listed above to get the date when the customer can actually have it. and if it the stock does not meet expected sales orders and deliveries. less transportation time. Basically. which will not give invoice details as this is a summation of data based on the billing date. The system will check stock in the plant. less production/purchase time if applicable. or give you a date based on the production time or purchasing time from the material master. If there is enough stock in the plant/SLoc. Run MC22 and re-generate your info-structure (make sure you play with S001). plus what is contained in the availability checking rule (scope of check) eg: can add POs for replenishment. SAP first backward schedules looking at the required delivery date. usually just a pricing quote. it will create a purchase requisition (outside purchase) or requirement or . You would need to create a custom SIS structure and add the invoice as a characteristic. When it is converted to an order. the system will give you a confirmed date. The date the system proposes is based on the customer's requested delivery date. T-code MCVV will allow you to simulate how a single invoice would update all SIS structures. purchase reqs. then it will confirm the customer¶s required date. Availability Check on Quotation SAP standard does not do an availability check on the quotation.

planned order (for production) to cover the shortfall. I've illustrated this below: Original Product: ABC Substitutes: DEF. When MRP is started. Availability check can be configured both at requiremnt class and at the schedule line categories level. SD material Determination based on availability check For SD material Determination you can create a Substitution reason and on the Strategy field. We expect the Substitution reason to give us this functionallity. the first product substitution should be for the original material. . the following info. We thought the worse case is to create a ABAP which is linked to the "requirement" field in the Procedure (OV13). Has anyone had the same requirement? Is this a bug or just incorrectly documented? I also encountered this abnormally recently using material determination. is available: Product selection in the background is performed on the basis of the availability check. We want to have the material determination only in case on material shortage. In order to combat the problem. It does not hovever take the availabilty into account before substitution. structure the Material Determination record as follows: Material Entered: ABC Substitutes: ABC DEF XYZ There seems to be a devaition at availability check and or on a conceptual note still. it will turn the PR into a PO or the requirement into a production order. XYZ In order to perform product substitution ONLY in the case of ATP failure for product ABC.

Creating Multiple Materials in Material Determination Material Determination is used to swap one material for another.Checking group must be defined in Material Master records(it controls whthr the system is to create individual or collective reqmnt) A combination of checking gropup and checking rule will determine the scope of availbaility check.It is possible to get a list of materials for substituiton.Whilst the availabilty check at the requirement class level via global and mandatory configuration the schedule line catgry availability check deals with the order. It is mandatory that the reqmnt class is flagged off for avlblty check and the schdelu line cat need not be.e. 2.maintaining procedures for material determination and assigning procedures to sales doc.save.select A for Stategy . Reqmnt type must exist by which a requiremnt class can be found 3. Click the Variants Icon on top left-Sreen opens . Must be swithced on at the requirment class level and at the schedule line level.but remember you can substitue only one material from the list. maintaining condition types. The following are the mandatory for Availability check to happen-1. There must exist a plant and is defined 4. types have been done) Create one material determination.dont forget to give the Subst reason on top and also on the line. This can be done through substituiton reason T Code [OVRQ] See the substitution reason number for Manual Material Selection .check the Entry box . Go To VB11 to create Material Determination (taking into consideration that all the previous steps for material determiantion i.check the Warning box .

Specify different materials you want to swap with the material you have enterd Note that the subst reason is already copied on the screen Remember materials should be of the same sales area. Precise scheduling calculated down to the day. All four of the delivery and transportation scheduling lead times are subtracted from the customer's requested delivery date to determine if this date can be met. The system calculates backward scheduling as follows: Requested delivery date minus transit time = Goods issue date Goods issue date minus loading time = Loading date Loading date minus transportation lead time = Transportation scheduling date Loading date minus pick/pack time = Material availability date By default. It is activated by maintaining the working hours for a particular shipping point. Backward and Forward Scheduling Backward scheduling is the calculation of deadline dates: the arrival time at the customer site is calculated as the earliest possible goods receipt time at the customers unloading point on the requested delivery date. This is referred to as daily scheduling. This allows the scheduling of a delivery within a single day. the system must then use forward scheduling. hour and minute is supported. The . and pick/pack time are subtracted from the customer¶s requested delivery date to calculate the required material availability date. In this case the system assumes a 24 hour work day and lead times can be entered in days up to 2 decimal points. This new material availability date forms the starting point for scheduling the remaining activities. Backward scheduling is always carried out first. The system does an availability check to determine the first possible date when product will be available. the system will calculate delivery dates the closest day. If the material availability date or transportation scheduling date is calculated to be in the past. The transit time. taking into consideration the working days of the shipping point and a rounding profile.atleast Divisions should be same. Forward scheduling is also done if no product is available on the material availability date calculated by backward scheduling. loading time.

4. Advantages of individual processing over summarized processing ± Backorder processing is possible. Note that you must define checking rules for each individual application such as for production orders for example. The checking group determines whether and how the system checks the stock availability and generates requirements for material planning. 6. For performing an availability check checking group has to work in conjunction with checking rule. line and schedule line individually which gives a greater control on available stock and requirements placed on stock. receipts and issues are to be included in the availability check and whether the check is to be carried out with or without the replenishment lead time. 3. The checking rule. The checking group + checking rule determine how the availability check is to be performed. A requirements type must exist by which the requirements class can be found. 5. 2. receipts and issues to be taken into account. Briefly explaining the above ± checking group determines which type of requirement to be passed on to MRP whether it be individual or summarized and checking rule which is at the transaction level and can be configured independently for each application module. determines which stocks.e. You can access (MD04) order. Required data for the Availability check to be carried out ± The Availability check must be switched on at the requirement class level. that is. determines the scope of the availability check for every business operation.Manoj Mahajan Configuring Availability Check Through Checking Groups 1. The system automatically uses individual requirements in case of special stock items. summarized requirements (daily/weekly) or individual requirements for each sales order. In Sales and Distribution. in conjunction with the checking group. transit time.loading time. and transportation lead time are added to the new material availability date to calculate the confirmed delivery date. The Availability check must be set at the schedule line level. . 7. The checking group defines what type of requirements will be passed on i. *-. the checking rule is specified internally within the system and cannot be changed. pick/pack time. which stocks. The checking rule applies to how the availability check is to be carried out at the transaction level.

However if there is no entry present in the material master record for the checking group. this default value is over written by MMR. Defining default values for checking groups . Total sales and total deliveries columns are there to configure a checking rule to sum up requirements to post to MRP either individually or by day or week. Defining material block for other users ± the block check box is an indicator that enables you to block material master records of a particular material during the availability check and restrict other users from accessing same master record and reserve the material. If an entry exists. C) Create orders for the material. 12. SAP standard checking groups are 01 ± summarized requirements and 02 ± individual requirements or you can create your own by copying the standard ones. 8. . 11. you tell the system what stock on hand and what inward and outward movements of stock it must take into account when performing the availability check in addition to whether or not to consider the replenishment lead time. the material is blocked during the availability check and other users cannot: a) Make changes in the material master record. Block quantity required can be set if you want several users to be able to process the material simultaneously in different transactions without blocking each other.Checking groups are introduced into the sales order based on the setting in the material master record. If the block is not set. Controlling Availability Check ± in this section. The no check indicator is CHECKED when you DO NOT want the system to carry out ATP check. Configuring Availability check and defining Checking Groups ± Checking groups are introduced into the sales order based on the setting in the material master record. not knowing if the stock is available or not. 10. two users can confirm the same material at the same time for two different orders. 9.A plant must be defined in the sales order for each schedule line item (in other words plant must be defined for every material in MMR). b) Create purchase orders for the material. depending on material type and plant. These settings are based on the checking group that is assigned to the material master record and the checking rule that is predefined and assigned to the sales and distribution transaction. If you select this field. a default value can be set here. A checking group must be defined in the material master record in the MRP3 screen in the availability check field. This default value will be used by the system depending on the material type mentioned in MMR and plant in sales order.

Defining the elements in the availability check entirely depends on the business needs. CO06 .13. yet at the time of the delivery only include physical stock on hand waiting to be shipped. but a few tips are given under ± When controlling the Availability check at the time of the sales order. a purchase requisition does not necessarily indicate by it is going to come into the plant. However. you may indicate so here. It is possible to indicate to the system that you would like the availability check NOT TO CHECK the stock at the storage location level. It is always recommended not to select the shipping notifications for the delivery requirements type as you may not actually receive the stock into plant or warehouse for which you are creating a delivery. Should you not want the system to automatically check RLT. In this case. 15. These settings carry out control both for sales order and delivery as well. It is used to switch off the check at storage location level.Execute Rescheduling/ Rescheduling Sales and Stock Transfer Documents: by material .a confirmed purchase order ± is a good indicator of receiving stock on a specified date. Back Order Processing Using CO06 and V_V2 What are the difference between CO06 and V_V2 ? Both seem to be backorder rescheduling transactions. You create a reservation for a particular storage location. RLT is the time taken for a material to become available.Material . the system carries out the check at plant level only and does not take the storage location into account that is specified in the reservation.SD Document . 14. 16. the scope of the availability check is set in such a way as to exclude the storage location. A shipping notification on the other hand . This is due to the fact that you may want to include specific stock or incoming stock for the sales order. 17. This indicator is used to set the scope of the availability check.Backorder Processing (rescheduling program SAPMV75B) V_V2 . It is only used when doing an ATP check and is taken from MMR.Back order Processing (rescheduling program SAPLATP4) V_RA .

In Tab: Shipping. This report is basically is run in case of inconsistency of stock. STO's etc then that stock can be released via this report. What I need is: . removal of confirmation of stock and if some stock is blocked under some unwanted processes like old SO's..Schedule line: quantity confirmed on todays date 29-09-2009 But my quantity is confirmed for the next day. but it prompt " please select a line that can be changed". Code: VOV8 Select your Sales Doc. deliveries. Check Box: Immediate Delivery (press F1 to read more about this functionality). can someone tell me why the confirmed qty can't be changed. Confirm quantity in schedule line I'm using service material in my sales order and I need the schedule line to confirm the quantity always in the actual day (not depending on the delivery date). I'm using service material. CO06 confirmed qty can't be change I want to change the confirmed qty in orders and use tcode CO06. . any restrict condition if I want to change it? Run the report SDRQCR21 for the said material/plant and then check if its confirmation from CO09 goes out or not.The rescheduling program (SDV03V02) behind the V_V2. I selected the blue line . "Purchase requisition with delivery scheduling" is not checked and still the quantity is not confirmed on the sales order date (todays date).. To solve your issue: T.Create a sales order with todays date: 29-09-2009 . type and Double-Click.

we can only confirm the delivery of goods. Code: OVZ9 Checked the Box: Check without RLT . . 4. production orders. for the required delivery date if the goods are available for all the necessary processing activities which take place before delivery. The planned inward movements of stocks (purchase orders. 2. 3. If it is mentioned any days. See The Scope of ATP Check How to see the scope of ATP check? When we creat a sales order. Types of availability check: There are 3 types of availability checks in sales document processing: 1. etc) and The planned out ward movements of stock (Sales orders. It should have been blank. Check in material master MRP2 view how many days are maintained for the fields In-House production and GR Processing Time. Code: OVLZ Field: Pick/pack time wrkdys whether you have maintained any value. Check on the basis of ATP Quantities The ATP quantity is calculated from the ware house stock. T.Note: There are few more settings that you may check: 1. planned orders. Check on the basis of ATP quantities (Available To Promise) 2. delivery documents.) This type of check is performed dynamically for each transaction with or without replenishment lead time (RLT). T. Check against planning. Code: VOV8 Check how many days mentioned in Lead time in Days. Check against Product Allocation 3. etc. remove it. T.

RLT : It is the time that is needed to order or produce the requested material, the system determines the RLT according to specific times maintained in the material master record. Depending on the material type RLT can be calculated according to various time periods. For ex: In the case of trading goods it is determined according to the planned delivery time, purchase processing time and the goods receipt processing time. Availability check including RLT: Availability is checked up to the end of Replenishment Lead Time. If the material availability data is calculated on the basis of current date to lie after the RLT, item it self can be confirmed despite insufficient stock being available. In this case the system assumes that any quantity requested by the customer can be procured by the material availability date and consider the goods to be available. Controlling availability check in sales document processing. We need to customize SD Specific settings and General Settings General Control Features: The following control elements need to be maintained in customizing and in the material master record. 1. Strategy group: The allowed planning strategies i.e. the main strategy and further possible strategies are combined in a strategy group. It is specified in the Material Master Record in MRP3 view. Note: In customizing, the strategy groups are assigned to MRP groups depending on the Plant so that the strategy group is automatically proposed in the Material Master. 2. MRP group: The MRP group combines the material from the point of material requirements planning which is specified on the MRP1 view in the Material Master Data. SD Specific Control Features: 1. Requirements class: It controls all control features for planning and is also specifies whether the availability check is to take place for materials in the SD documents on the basis of ATP quantities and whether the requirements are to be passed on. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions

Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define procedure by requirement class Checking groups: Checking group controls whether the system is to create individual or collective requirements in sales and shipping process. In addition a material block for the availability check with transfer of requirements can be set here. The checking group can also be used to deactivate the availability check. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define checking groups Checking rule: We use the checking rule to control the scope of availability check for each transaction the SD process. Checking rule in the combination of checking group determines the scope of availability check Creating checking rule SPRO Material management Purchasing Purchase order Set up stock transport order Create checking rule Scope of availability check SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check

Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Carry out control for availability check Go to New Entries and define the scope of check in the combination of checking group and checking rule. The following elements can be involved in the availability check STOCKS: []Include safety stocks: Minimum stock at plant/ware house []Stock in transfer []Include quality inspection stock []Include Inward movement Out ward movement Purchase orders Sales requirements Purchase requisitions Deliveries Planned orders Release orders etc. Production orders If we do not check the field [] µcheck without RLT¶ the system considers RLT while checking the availability of the material Note: Blocking the material for availability check SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define material block for other users If we check the field Block [] during the availability check of a material the users cannot make changes in the Material Master, cannot create PO, cannot create sales orders. Note: During the Material Master creation the system automatically proposes the checking group. Further the following setting is required. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions

Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define checking groups default values. We need to assign the checking group to the combination of material type and plant.

ettlement Downpayment with Installment payment Term
Scenario :- Problem with Down payment settlement using installment payment term. 1. When we create Sales order, (sales item value = 100) use payment term : 0009 (Installment Payment term, 30%, 40%, 30%). In the Billing Plan, I specify 2 records, 1st record is Downpayment request 30% of Order value, billing type is FAZ . the 2nd record is Final invoice 100%, billing type is F2. 2. Create Billing type Down payment request , it will document as Noted item in the accounting document. 3. Receive Downpayment from customer via FI screen , at this stage the asccounting document is created as following Dr. Cash/Bank 30 Cr. Advance from customer 30 4. When I create Billing document for the sales item, the down payment value will be proposed for settlement at Billing Creation, I then accept the default value of down payment clearing. The accounting document is as below Dr. AR 30 (*split AR by installment payment term) AR 40 AR 30 Cr. Sales 100 Dr. Advance from customer 30 Cr. AR 9 (DP. 30% * 30) Cr AR 12 (DP. 30% * 40) Cr AR 9 (DP. 30% * 30) It seems SAP settlement Down payment by Installment Payment term. I was wondering that is there are alternative or an option to setup the Down payment settlement independent of Installment term. I meant, I don't want to have the last 3 Credit item as above, I want only 1 line item of credit, the accounting should be

Dr. AR 30 (*split AR by installment payment term) AR 40 AR 30 Cr. Sales 100 Dr. Advance from customer 30 Cr. AR 30 (Not separate by Installment payment term) Solutions : Suggesstions on how I could proceed? Your problem with Down payment settlement is common. Many users object to the down payment or security lodgement mechanism. In our case we often park and apply the advance manually to final invoice. However, following the above case we sometimes use this with our PS orders: 1. Create Sales order, (sales item value = 100) with billing plan with three steps 30% down payment,30% std billiing on order completion and 70% on delivery. A little different to your original Billing Plan, but 1st record is Downpayment request 30% of Order value, billing type is FAZ . the 2nd & 3rd records are std F2 invoices 30% ,70%. 2. Create Billing type Down payment request , it will document as Noted item in the accounting document. 3. Receive Downpayment from customer via FI screen , at this stage the accounting document is created as following :Dr. Cash/Bank 30 Cr. Security deposit payment 30 ( In many countries this may be subject to TAX laws) 4. Create the First Billing documents , the down payment value will be proposed for settlement at Billing Creation, then accept the default value of down payment clearing as these equal each other. The accounting document is as below Dr. AR 30 Cr. Sales 30 Dr. Advance from customer 30 Cr. AR 30 5. Create the Second Billing document ( down payment value has expired and will not be proposed) The accounting

no scale Sample flat file for uploading table A305 .6x Require flat file :ROW 1 BGR00 ROW 2 BKOND1 ROW 3 BKOND2 .no scale ROW 4 BKOND2 . AR 60 Cr. Sales and Distribution . you have to use SM35 to process the update program. Envirionment : 4.document is as below is then standard for the last installement.Batch Input for Uploading Condition Pricing After executing the program.Customer/Material with release status :0BIPRICE 123SAPABAP X 1VK15 A305V PR00 2ALL 990000123456SAP8204142100 2002043020020401 50USD 100PC 2ALL 990000123456SAP8217168100 2002043020020401 50USD 100PC 3 100PC 2 3 200PC 1 2ALL 990000123456SAP8220133910 There a total of 4 flat file format :BGR00 .with scale ROW 6 BKOND2 .Session Header Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- . Dr.no scale ROW 5 BKOND3 . Sales 60 This alternative provides a cleaner option with the Downpayment.Upload Condition Pricing RV14BTCI .

| Field name | Description Length | Dec. | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | GROUP | Group name 000012 | 000000 | | MANDT | Client 000003 | 000000 | | USNAM | User ID 000012 | 000000 | | START | Lock until: 000010 | 000000 | | XKEEP | Keep indicator 000001 | 000000 | | NODATA | No batch input 000001 | 000000 | | 0 | BI Session Name | Your client no | Queue user ID | Queue start date | CHAR | CHAR | CLNT | CHAR | DATS | | | | | | X . | | Report header | Cat.Header Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Field name | Description Length | Dec. | | Report header | Cat.g.don't delete SESS| CHAR | / | CHAR | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND1 . | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | TCODE | Transaction code 000020 | 000000 | | KVEWE | Usage 000001 | 000000 | | KOTABNR | Table 000003 | 000000 | | 1 | TCode = VK15 | U | Table e. 305 | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | | | | .

g V | CHAR | CHAR | | CTyp e. | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | VAKEY | VarKey 000100 | 000000 | | DATBI | Valid to 000010 | 000000 | | DATAB | Valid on 000010 | 000000 | | KBETR | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | KONWA | R/2 table 000005 | 000000 | | KPEIN | R/2 table 000005 | 000000 | | KMEIN | 000003 | 000000 | | MWSK1 | Tax code 000002 | 000000 | | KONMS | Scale UoM 000003 | 000000 | | 2 | VarKey | Valid to | Valid on | Amount | R2tab | R2tab | | CHAR | CHAR | DATS | DATS | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | UNIT | | | | | | | | | Tx | UoM | | .Main Data Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | Field name | Description Length | Dec. | | Report header | Cat.| KAPPL | Application 000002 | 000000 | | KSCHL | Condition type 000004 | 000000 | | App e.g PR00 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND2 .

| | Report header | Cat. 000001 | 000000 | | SKONWA | R/2 table 000005 | 000000 | | Amount | Amount | S | CndEx | D | R2tab | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | | | | | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND3 . | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | KSTBM | Quantity 000018 | 000000 | | KONMS | Scale UoM 000003 | 000000 | | KBETR | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | 3 | Quantity | UoM | Amount | CHAR | CHAR | UNIT | CHAR | | | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Sales Order Changed History Display * * Sales Order Changed History Display * * You can execute the report by : .Scale Data Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Field name | Description Length | Dec.| MXWRT | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | GKWRT | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | STFKZ | Scale type 000001 | 000000 | | KZNEP | Exclusion 000001 | 000000 | | LOEVM_KO | Deletion indic.

.sap-img. VBPA. WVBELN LIKE VBUK-VBELN.com * REPORT ZSDCHANGE LINE-SIZE 132 NO STANDARD PAGE HEADING LINE-COUNT 065(001) MESSAGE-ID VR. DD03L. DATA: BEGIN OF ITAB OCCURS 10. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDSHW. User Name * 3. XNAME FOR ICDHDR-USERNAME. SELECTION-SCREEN SKIP. WDEC1 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. WNAME LIKE CDHDR-USERNAME. WDEC2 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. DATA: BEGIN OF ICDSHW OCCURS 50. KONVC. WDEC4 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. ITEXT(16) VALUE 'has been created'. R1. Change Date * 2. T685T. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff * http://www. DATA: END OF ICDSHW. XVBELN FOR VBUK-VBELN. WCHANGENR LIKE CDHDR-CHANGENR.* 1. DATA: WFLAG. DATA: UTEXT(16) VALUE 'has been changed'. CDPOS. TPART. CDHDR. WUDATE LIKE CDHDR-UDATE. DTEXT(16) VALUE 'has been deleted'. DATA: END OF ICDHDR. SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK BLK1 PARAMETERS: SUDATE RADIOBUTTON GROUP SNAME RADIOBUTTON GROUP SOBID RADIOBUTTON GROUP SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK BLK1. VBUK. DATA: BEGIN OF ICDHDR OCCURS 50. Sales Order Number * * Submitted by : SAP Basis. SELECT-OPTIONS: XUDATE FOR ICDHDR-UDATE. TABLES: DD04T. DD41V. R1. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDHDR. WITH FRAME TITLE TEXT-001. WDEC3 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. R1. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDSHW.

CASE ITAB-TABNAME. MOVE ITAB-TABKEY TO VBPA. SELECT SINGLE * FROM T685T WHERE SPRAS = SY-LANGU AND KVEWE = 'A' AND KAPPL = 'V' AND KSCHL = KONVC-KSCHL. CLEAR CDHDR. WHEN 'VBAP'. WHEN 'VBPA'. CDHDR-OBJECTCLAS = 'VERKBELEG'. MODIFY ITAB. ENDIF. SELECT SINGLE * FROM TPART WHERE SPRAS = SY-LANGU AND PARVW = VBPA-PARVW. PERFORM READHEADER. ETENR(4). LOOP AT ITAB. ENDIF. REPLACE '&' WITH ITAB-FTEXT(40) INTO ITAB-INDTEXT.DATA: UDATE LIKE CDHDR-UDATE. USERNAME LIKE CDHDR-USERNAME. ENDIF. REPLACE '&' WITH TPART-VTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. IF ITAB-FNAME = 'KUNNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'LIFNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'PARNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'PERNR' OR ITAB-FNAME IS INITIAL. CLEAR CDPOS. CONDENSE ITAB-INDTEXT. IF ITAB-FNAME IS INITIAL. REPLACE '%' WITH DTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. VBELN(10). REPLACE '%' WITH ITEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. REPLACE '%' WITH UTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. CDHDR-OBJECTID = VBUK-VBELN. ENDIF. ELSEIF ITAB-CHNGIND = 'U'. IF ITAB-INDTEXT(1) EQ '&'. ENDIF. IF SY-SUBRC = 0. PERFORM READPOS. INDTEXT(200). POSNR(6). REPLACE '&' WITH 'Item' INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. MOVE ITAB-TABKEY TO KONVC. ELSE. END OF ITAB. . CHANGENR LIKE CDHDR-CHANGENR. WHEN 'KONVC'. IF SY-SUBRC = 0. SELECT * FROM VBUK WHERE VBELN IN XVBELN. REPLACE '&' WITH T685T-VTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. ENDIF. IF ITAB-CHNGIND = 'I'. ENDCASE.

WCHANGENR = ITAB-CHANGENR. ENDSELECT. ELSE. WRITE: 013 ITAB-CHNGIND. ENDIF. ENDIF. WRITE:/023 ITAB-USERNAME. ENDIF. ELSE. IF WCHANGENR NE ITAB-CHANGENR. LOOP AT ITAB. SORT ITAB BY USERNAME VBELN POSNR ETENR UDATE. WRITE: /013 ITAB-CHNGIND. WRITE:/001 ITAB-VBELN. 057 ITAB-ETENR. 065 ITAB-INDTEXT(60). ENDIF. SKIP.ENDLOOP. 057 ITAB-ETENR. WCHANGENR = ITAB-CHANGENR. CLEAR WFLAG. SORT ITAB BY VBELN POSNR ETENR UDATE. WNAME = ITAB-USERNAME. 049 ITAB-POSNR. ELSEIF SOBID = 'X'. WRITE:/065 ITAB-F_NEW. ELSEIF SOBID NE 'X'. WFLAG = 'X'. IF SUDATE = 'X'. WRITE:/001 ITAB-UDATE. 037(10) ITAB-VBELN. WVBELN = ITAB-VBELN. ENDIF. IF WNAME NE ITAB-USERNAME. 037(10) ITAB-VBELN. IF WUDATE NE ITAB-UDATE. 049 ITAB-POSNR. SORT ITAB BY UDATE VBELN POSNR ETENR. 065 ITAB-INDTEXT(60). ENDIF. SKIP. WRITE:/001 ITAB-USERNAME. ELSE. WFLAG = 'X'. IF WVBELN NE ITAB-VBELN. IF WFLAG = 'X'. . 023 ITAB-USERNAME. IF SUDATE = 'X'. ENDLOOP. WUDATE = ITAB-UDATE. WRITE:/065 ITAB-F_OLD. ENDIF. SKIP.

FORM READHEADER. WHEN '0001'. CHECK ICDSHW-CHNGIND NE 'E'. WHEN OTHERS. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY(6) TO ITAB-POSNR. LOOP AT ICDHDR. MOVE-CORRESPONDING ICDHDR TO ITAB. CALL FUNCTION 'CHANGEDOCUMENT_READ_HEADERS' EXPORTING DATE_OF_CHANGE = CDHDR-UDATE OBJECTCLASS = CDHDR-OBJECTCLAS OBJECTID = CDHDR-OBJECTID TIME_OF_CHANGE = CDHDR-UTIME USERNAME = CDHDR-USERNAME TABLES I_CDHDR = ICDHDR EXCEPTIONS NO_POSITION_FOUND = 1 OTHERS = 2. LEAVE. MESSAGE S311. WHEN '0002'. CLEAR ITAB. ENDCASE. MOVE-CORRESPONDING ICDSHW TO ITAB. ENDFORM. MOVE ICDHDR-OBJECTID TO ITAB-VBELN. CASE ITAB-TABNAME. WHEN '0000'. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+3(10) TO ITAB-VBELN. CHECK ICDHDR-UDATE IN XUDATE. WHEN '0000'. CASE SY-SUBRC. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+13(6) TO ITAB-POSNR. CALL FUNCTION 'CHANGEDOCUMENT_READ_POSITIONS' EXPORTING CHANGENUMBER = ICDHDR-CHANGENR TABLEKEY = CDPOS-TABKEY TABLENAME = CDPOS-TABNAME IMPORTING HEADER = CDHDR TABLES EDITPOS = ICDSHW EXCEPTIONS NO_POSITION_FOUND = 1 OTHERS = 2. . CHECK ICDHDR-USERNAME IN XNAME. LEAVE. FORM READPOS. WHEN 'KONVC'. LOOP AT ICDSHW. MESSAGE S311. CASE SY-SUBRC.

Every effort is made to ensure the content integrity. 025 'Change Date'. 015 'Time'. All product names are trademarks of their respective companies. WRITE:/001 'User Name'. 049 'Line'. SY-PAGNO. 120 'Page'. *--. 037 'Sale Order'. 065 'Changes'. 065 'Comment'. 065 'Changes'. ENDLOOP. APPEND ITAB. WRITE: / SY-REPID. All rights reserved. ENDIF. ULINE.sap-img. MOVE '& %' TO ITAB-INDTEXT. 021 'Sch No'. CLEAR ITAB. IF SUDATE = 'X'. WHEN OTHERS. 057 'Sch No'. ELSEIF SOBID = 'X'. 037 'Sale Order'.SY-UZEIT. ULINE. WRITE:/001 'Change Date'. LEAVE.MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+19(4) ENDCASE. 50 'SALES ORDER CHANGE HISTORY'. TO ITAB-ETENR. 013 'Time'. 60 'SALES ORDERS STATISTICS'.com is in no way affiliated with SAP AG.sap-img. 057 'Sch No'. 023 'User Name'. 049 'Line'. WRITE:/ SY-DATUM. WRITE:/001 'Sale Order'. 029 'Change Date'. TOP-OF-PAGE.com and the content authors.End of Program All the site contents are Copyright © www. 051 'User Name'. The site www. ENDCASE. Information used on this site is at your own risk. 013 'Line'. SKIP. ENDLOOP. ELSE. MESSAGE S311. 041 'Time'. ENDFORM. .

MV45AOZZ For entering additional installation-specific modules for sales document processing which are called up by the screen and run under PBO (Process Before Output) prior to output of the screen. The modules must start with "ZZ". .sap-img.Sales and Distribution ---. Involved program components System modifications for sales document processing affect different areas.System Modifications --User Exits There you will find all the details by checking IMG Activity Documentation. You will have User exit for . data validation).Sales Document Processing. The modules must start with "ZZ". User-specific metadata must start with "ZZ". . you make the changes in the program components provided: .MV45ATZZ For entering metadata for sales document processing. Depending on the modification. which may be required and can be used if necessary.The content on this site may not be reproduced or redistributed without the express written permission of www. the required INCLUDES and user exits are described. . User Exits on Sales and Distribution Where to find the User Exits on Sales and Distribution along with functionality? To see the detail go to SPRO --. This IMG step describes additional installation-specific processing in sales document processing. In particular.MV45AFZZ and MV45EFZ1 For entering installation-specific FORM routines and for using user exits. . These program components are called up by the modules in MV45AOZZ or MV45AIZZ. These are called up by the screen and run under PAI (Process After Input) after data input (for example.MV45AIZZ For entering additional installation-specific modules for sales document processing.com or the content authors.

User exits in program RV60AFZD Short descriptions of the user exits are contained in the program: USEREXIT_RELI_XVBPAK_AVBPAK . program RV60AFZC) Depending on the number range. It is used to provide the header and the item of the new billing document with deviating or additional data. USEREXIT_PRINT_HEAD (Module pool SAPLV61A. these all are trigger during VF02. This user exit is only called when the billing documents is created. USEREXIT_ACCOUNT_PREP_KOMKCV (Module pool SAPLV60A. Customer User Exit For Billing What are the user exit for billing document release to accounting? Please check below exits/customer exits. program RV60AFZZ) The internal number range used in the standard system is specified in the billing type table and can be changed in this user exit. table TVFKD is used to set the billing date (countryspecific requirements in Italy). USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE (Module pool SAPLV60A. program RV60AFZZ) In this user exit additional fields for account determination that are not provided in the standard system are copied into communication structure KOMKCV (header fields). USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE is automatically deactivated when this user exit is being applied. USEREXIT_PRINT_ITEM (Module pool SAPLV61A. program RV60AFZC) This user exit is only called when the billing document is created. USEREXIT_FILL_VBRK_VBRP (Module pool SAPLV60A. USEREXIT_ACCOUNT_PREP_KOMPCV (Module pool SAPLV60A) In this user exit additional fields for account determination that are not provided in the standard system are copied into communication structure KOMPCV (item fields). USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE_INV_DATE (Module pool SAPLV60A. program RV61AFZB) Printing the item line of a billing document can be supplemented or changed. Program RV61AFZB) Printing the header line of a billing document can be supplemented or changed.You will find all User Exits on Sales and Distribution along with functionality.

you can change the business transaction. ACCIT and ACCHD After the accounting document is filled in with data. the name of the person who created it or the transaction with which the document was created. EXIT_SAPLV60B_002: Change the customer line ACCIT You can use this exit to change the customer line in the accounting document. EXIT_SAPLV60B_007: Change the installment plan You can use exit 007 to add information to the installment plan parameters in the GL account item. EXIT_SAPLV60B_005: User exit for accruals Once all relevant data for accruals was entered in the GL account item. EXIT_SAPLV60B_008: Change the transfer structure ACCCR. you can add to this data with this exit. For example. You can use exit 003 to influence the ACCIT structure. EXIT_SAPLV60B_006: Change the control line ACCIT You can use exit 006 to add information to the control line. This exit is processed once the ACCIT structure is filled in with data from document header VBRK.USEREXIT_NEWROLE_XVBPAK_AVBPAK USEREXIT_NEWROLE_XVBPAP_AVBPAK The following user exits are available in report SAPLV60B for transfer to accounting (function group V60B): EXIT_SAPLV60B_001: Change the header data in the structure acchd You can use this exit to influence the header information of the accounting document. EXIT_SAPLV60B_003: Change the customer line in costing The customer line is filled in differently for costing. you can use exit 008 to change the document once again. . EXIT_SAPLV60B_004: Change a GL account item ACCIT You can add information to a GL account item (such as quantity specifications) with this exit. EXIT_SAPLV60B_010: Item table for customer lines You can use exit 10 to influence the contents of customer lines before they are created. "created on" date and time.

test_pack . Note: Use enhancement "SDVFX008". . . Basic Process of how Packing Works Let's say you want to pack a material shirt_jai in test_pack. We have done similar development to update SGTXT field in BSEG.Plant is entered manually in handling unit Pack. cat. Items . SDVFX008 will indeed trigger while you create accounting document through VF01 or VF02. The settings that I chose: Plant determ.Packaging materials Generate Dlv. Check whether the function exit is activated.JPAC MM02: Check settings for the materials First. create material type=packaging test_pack [SPRO] IMG-Logistics Execution-Shipping-PackingDefine Packaging Material Types Let's say JPAC. Using MM01. Component : "EXIT_SAPLV60B_008".Number range interval 'HU_VEKP' IMG-Logistics Execution-Shipping-PackingDefine material group for packaging material Let's say JGRP IMG-Logistics Execution-Shipping-PackingDefine allowed packaging materials JGRP .EXIT_SAPLV60B_0011: Change the parameter for cash account determination or reconciliation account determination You can use this exit to change inbound parameters in order to influence account determination.blank Number assignment . matl.

change the "partial quantity" to 40 of material R-1160. Pack. Or you can do the following steps while you are creating a delivery also. It generates a shipping unit/handling unit number. you already created. You need to create a delivery and A)pack 40 pieces each of the material are grouped together into larger cardboard boxes (PK-100 . Type: JPAC (Note) Basic Data 1 -> Material: JMAT Then. Content Author : Jairam Author Website : http://www. Pack. 6)Now. 2)Go to "pack" icon. 3)In the upper section. Matls: JGRP Sales:General/Plant -> Packaging Mat. Grp.shipping/packing material) and B)these 3 cardboard boxes are put into pallet (PK-095). Type: Basic Data 1 -> Material: JMAT VL01N Outbound Delivery -> Packing Enter the materials at top and at bottom (Select shirt_jai and Edit .geocities.hard disks) for a qty .Pack) This is how the basic process of packing works. Grp. enter the "packing material" (PK-100) 4)In the lower section. Solution: A)Packing 40 pieces each of material (40 x 3 = 120 pieces) 1)Goto [VL02N] to change the delivery. 5)Select both the lines of upper section and lower section and click the green ok. shirt_jai Sales:General/Plant -> Matl. qty" . Matls: JGRP (Note) Sales:General/Plant -> Packaging Mat.120 pieces.com/jairam143/ The "Packing Process" with an Example Example: You created a order for a material(R-1160 .Sales:General/Plant -> Matl. select both lines of upper & lower section & click the button "per part.

5)Now all the 3 cartons(PK-100 with 40 pieces each of material) are packed in one big carton (PK-095). These are the condition type that will display the results of the unit costing for certain type of sales document. Check: "General overview" icon. click "pack HUs" (pack shipping unit) 2)enter the packaging material (PK-095) in the upper section and select this line. Difference between Condition Type Please explain the difference between Ek01 ( Actual Cost) and EK02 Calculated Cost. EK02: If you use this condition type. 2) The condition type must agree with the condition type defined for unit costing in the pricing procedure. EK01 : If you use this condition type. B)Packing all 3 cartons in one big carton(PK-095) 1) from above screen. Please note the following points : 1) The condition type must have condition category 'Q' (costing). the result of unit costing is issued to the first position on the conditions screen for the item. the result of unit costing is simply a statistical value which you can compare with the price. Then "save" the delivery. I have a customer who is being offered two discounts ie k007 and k005. click "pack" icon.(New HU per part qty of material) Check: click "General Overview" icon to see whether it packed 40 pieces of material in 3 cartons. The value can be used as a basis for price determination. now I want to exclude k007 for the next 2 . 3)select 3 lines of PK-100 in lower section since you want to pack them in PK-095. 4)selecting both lines.

Hiding Price Condition Types on a Sales Document Up to now you. Am I missing something.ZDXX . As an illustration :ZPXX 3500 ZDXX 1000ZWXX 500(all condition types are shown separately in pricing view) Journal: Dr Vendor 2000 Cr Sales 2000 (ZPXX .ZWXX) One way to do it is :Mark the condition types you want to group as statistical and remove the account assignment key. And also the settings of the Requirements as it is correct that it overrules the exclusion. how do I do it? I think u need to change the validity of the condition record for the condition type K007 defining it not valid for that particular 2 months.but still the condition is being accepted when I create a sales order. Arvind Rana Accumulate the amount of condition types in accounting document To accumulate the amount of condition types in accounting document without affecting the pricing display in billing document.orders or so? I have set the exclusion indicator for the condition type. you still cannot exclude certain condition types and subtotal lines from being processed or displayed in the condition screen by restricting the authorizations. This way the individual components will still display on your pricing screen but FI will only get one posting. . Create a subtotal in your pricing procedure that will add them together and put in the account assignment key for it.

2. 105621 . 1. Assign this to your relevant sales area+ dpp+cupp. Document Procedure (defined in Sales doc\Billing doc maintenance) 5. (Do assign relevant access sequence) 3. This is generally done for output taxes since output taxes depend upon the . Distribution Channel 3. freight etc. While specifying requirement.22 which specifies that plant has to be set. Pricing Procedure is determined thru trx OVKK. we can give reqt no. Use transaction code v/08 to define pricing procedure.Authorization check for the condition screen Creating New Pricing Procedure What is the transaction code for creating new pricing procedure and how to attach it to specific plant? You create PP in spro > Sales and Distribution > Basic Functions > Pricing > Pricing Control > Define and Assign Pricing Procedures > Maintain Pricing Procedures You can't attach PP to specific plant. The defining parameters for pricing procedure determination are: 1.You have to implement SAP Note No. Sabir Reg pricing procedure. Division 4. SalesOrg 2. It can be for base price.. Pricing procedure assigned to customer (defined in customer master) Hope this helps. discount. 4. Use transaction code v/06 to define condition type. Use transaction code v/07 to create a access sequence and assign tables based on which you want to carry on pricing as accesses.

delivering plant. There you have the options of either Qty based . But directly there is no assignment between plant and pricing procedure. but with a rate of 10%. imagine you have a condition type ZZ01. "ignore the 10% altogether. Alternative Calculation Type: Normally if you want to calculate a value you have to use a calculation type for determinating the value. Then the calculation will be done based on the quantity of the material. with a condition record maintained (master data) for $100. The standard calculation would result in a final value of $110. Here what happens is suppose if you define Your condition type that calculates the base price of a material on Qty based." Then. and you could end up with $100 + (20% of $90) = $118. which was $90. For example. you end up with a final value of $100 + (20% of $100) = $120. subtraction or multiplication. while the alternate calculation is used to modify the final value. the final value would be $100 + (10% of $90) = $109.use the original price PR00 only. What is "alt cal type" & "alt base value" & "Requirement field" in the Pricing Procedure Can any one explain exactly what is "alt cal type" & "alt base value" and also " Requirement field" in the pricing procedure? The alternate base value is used as the calculation basis only. Instead. Put them both together. condition ZZ02 also exists lower in the schema. The alternate calculation routine says. The alternate base value could say." Then. Fixed Amount Based or Percentage based. Hope this helps. This calculation type is either addition. Similarly SAP also has got a default calculation type in the control data of the condition type. "don't use $100 as the basis -. Now. Now once again. If the customer orders 10 Nos and you have maintained a unit . use an externally calculated 20%.

Requirement: A factor in the condition technique that restricts access to a condition table. Now you don't want to take the base value and take other values as base value which are derived on some formulae. Alternative Condition Base value : If you have to calculate any value then you have to have a base value for it. Normally you take the condition value of the base price of the material to calculate the value. Example: The system uses an access sequence to determine the price of a material. For ex if you are calculating the Freight charges for a Material . it depends on so many criteria like. *-. Then this percentage is taken as the calculation type and the condition value is determined.price of 100 Rs for each material then the value determined is 1000 INR. One of the accesses in the sequence contains the requirement "in foreign currency. in those cases. This means if you maintain the value of 10 % in the condition record. you forego the default value and then use the alternative calculation type in calculating the condition value against the particular condition. Similarly if the discount condition type . So you create a routine which will do the mathematical operations in the routine and derive you a value which is now used as the base value for calculating the condition value for a particular condition type. In some cases you have to forego the default calculation types and use the customer specific method for calculating a value. you maintain the calculation type as %. For ex if you want to calculate the discount of 10 % for a material then you have to have a base value on which this 10% is calculated." The system only uses the table behind this access if the sales order for which the price must be calculated is in a foreign currency. the weight. The system only accesses a condition table to determine the price if the requirement specified has been met.Ajay Kumar Veeranki Re-pricing in a Quotation How can I. or am I able to find anything on a way of RE-Pricing be done in a QUOTATION? . volume and also the minimum amount etc etc.

etc. However. . The only values for which $50 should apply are 10. You are trying to sell items in specific bulk quantities. it should return $100 again. If you are asking how to reprice a quotation when it converts into a sales order. You are fairly certain there is basic functionality that covers this. from a business process perspective it makes absolutely NO sense to reprice a quotation when converting to a sales order. You would vastly prefer to keep one part number that you order from the supplier. 20. if a customer orders 1 piece. 2 pieces. either in create or change modes. however you have in house consumption that is allowed to consume only 1 part at a time.6c. etc. If the customer tries to order 11 pieces.You can always 'Update" pricing manually in a quotation the same way you do in a sales order. 13. the price is $50. of part ABC. Just choose the combination of documents and the respective item category. After all. that can be done with the copy controls of the Item Category. the price is $100. the entire point of using quotations is to firm up details like pricing before creating the sales order. consume internally and ship externally. 12. and only give the discount for specific quantity intervals. The field you need to be concerned with is "Pricing type". However. IMG: Sales & Dist --> Sales --> --> Maintain Copy Control for Sales Docs --> Sales Doc to Sales Doc (transaction vtaa). Quantity Based Discounts in Bulk Quantities Sales You're looking to implement quantity based discounts in 4. You have discussed changing your part number to reflect a bulk qty of 10. etc. For example. 3. If the customer orders 10 pieces of part ABC. .multiples of the bulk quantity 10. but you're just not sure where to start. 30. this is not only a standard minimum quantity discount. Menu path Edit --> New Pricing or press the 'Update pricing' button on the item conditions tab.

Can you put to item level field in the condition table and access sequence? Structure KOMK refers to header of the sales order. 6. 4. There is an error message in the sales order pricing analysis ("access not made" in the shipping point field). Place this new bulk price behind your normal "PR00" price in the pricing procedure 5. distribution channel and ship-to party together) to determine the sales price. pallet. Configure you bulk pricing condition type by usual means (it should be a base price rather than discount).Taking your requirements literally. Define/Select a UOM for selling in bulk (i.e. Determine Sales Price with Shipping Point You are trying to use shipping point as a key field (with sales org. In the access sequence. It is agreed with that creating a separate material number is not a good idea. but shipping point of course is on item level. You can try this :1. . and maintained the relevant setting (access sequence. box whatever) 2. Standard SAP scale pricing will not do it in that you only want the reduced price to come into effect when the order quantity is multiple of some bulk factor. Step 1 Append structure KOMP. cas. Create a new condition base value routine via VOFM where you check XKWERT to see if it is a whole number. Assign this new routine to your bulk price condition in your pricing procedure in ALT condition base value column. 7. condition type and pricing procedure). That should do it. Do this by changing through SE11 the table KOMPAZ. Maintain bulk price conditon record in the Bulk UOM. you found that the shipping point field's document structure is KOMK. it is possible. If it is not then set XKWERT to zero. You created a condition table with the above key fields. You'll have to do some settings to reach your goal. Maintain UOM conversion between your base UOM and this new UOM 3.

Say there that field ZVSTEL should be filled with information from your shipping point. Step 2 Change user exit MV45AFZZ. Pricing date based on delivery date Used transaction VOV8. Ask a programmer if you don't understand this part. There is a field called proposal for pricing date. Save. Step 4 Finish with the steps you did before. .g. you will see in your sales order that the shipping point is filled with information. This configuration is by order type. Save. ZZVSTEL with component type VSTEL. Now.Proposed pricing date based on the requested dlv. With the button technical view you can check which one ZZVSTEL or VSTEL. but first maintain your new field in Condition: allowed fields. Add a component e. assign search help H_TVST to the component. Step 3 Make a new table as you did before.This is the include for structure KOMP. generate. When you create your new table you will see you have two shipping points. There you can select pricing date as requested delivery date. The coding should be like tkomp-zzvstel = vbap-vstel.date (Header) This control is set at the document level as oppose to the condition type level (PR00). activate. If you want to make more points. That was ok. Do this under part FORM USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP. A . That means your other condition types such as surcharges and discounts are also determined using the requested delivery date.

If your requirement is for PR00 to alone to be priced at delivery date then this will not work.

How pricing date is determine in the sales order and billing document? Where is the setting?
The pricing date is proposed based on the setting you make in the Sales document configuration. ( T code : VOV8) You have a field" Prop.f.pricing date " in the Requested delivery date / pricing date / purchase order date segment. Then you can choose the follwoing options: Blank - Indicates the current date as the pricing date A - Indicates the date based on the requested delivery date B - Indicates the date based on the order validity start from date And the pricing in the billing document is copied from thte sales order / Delivery document.. It again depends on the setting u have in the copy control from order - billng or delivery - billing. In the copy control, in the item settings you have two fields relavant for this. One is pricing source and the other is pricing type. The pricing sources are generally the order. But if you want you can change it to other values mentioned in the drop down, but this values have no effect if the pricing type is B. Any other value other than B in the pricing type will take the reference document price mentioned in the pricing source field. but for the pricing type B. The new price is determined in the billing order.

Report to Check the Entered Pricing Condition Price
Which is the best transaction code to check the Pricing condition price entered in "VK11"? Other than "VK13", to display the price, you can use V/LD - Execute Pricing Report to check the prices entered into the Pricing Master.

Normally Pricing Report - "07 Cust.-specific Prices with Scale Display" will do. Other Pricing Reports you can tried are these:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------|LR|Report title | -- -----------------------------------------------------------------------|01|Comparison of Price Lists Without Scale Display | |02|Comparison of Price Groups Without Scale Display | |03|Incoterms with Scale Display | |04|Incoterms Without Scale Display | |05|Price List Types Without Scale Display | |06|Price List Types with Scale Display | |07|Cust.-specific Prices with Scale Display | |08|Cust.-specific Prices W/out Scale Display | |09|Material List/Material Pricing Group with Scale Display | |10|List Mat./Mat.Pricing Groups Without Scale Display | |11|Price Groups With Scale Display | |14|Taxes | |15|Material Price | |16|Individual Prices | |17|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer | |18|Discounts and Surcharges by Material | |19|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group | |20|Discounts and Surcharges by Material Group | |21|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer/Material | |22|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer/Material Group | |23|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group/Material | |24|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group/Material Group | |25|VAT/ATX1 | |26|Canada/USA | |27|I.E.P.S Mexico | |28|Conditions by Customer | |30|Conditions by Customer Hierarchy | |31|Price List with Release Status | |AC| | |AD| | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Mass Update of condition pricing
You can update the condition pricing for a range of sales order. For e.g. if you create sales order for 15 months or so, and at the beginning of each year, you have to update the prices for lots of sales orders. Other than using VA02 and make an Update of the conditions at item level which is a big work because you will have lots of open sales order after so many months. Use VA05, select your Orders and on the result screen :click Edit- > Mass Change -> New Pricing (menu).

or if you don't want to do that Online, write your own abap report and use Function SD_BULK_CHANGE (check where-Used at SE37, Trace VA05 on how to fill the parameters, Function MPRF => New Pricing)

Make Material Master Price of a material as sales price automatically
The first method is not to set the pricing condition VPRS as statistical. Simply remove PR00 and it will work fine if you always use VPRS as your pricing base inside the pricing procedure. VPRS will reads both prices based on the price control in the material master. Price control S for standard price. Price control V for moving average price. It is this simple if you do not have any other "Prices" in the price procedure. However, if you are using one pricing procedure where for some items you price using VPRS and some others using PR00, then you should use requirement routines to enable the correct price condition type at the right time. The second method involves more work as you need to write a formula (VOFM) to get that information. This is how it goes :1. Set VPRS to be the first step in the pricing procedure and to be subtotal B (as standard). 2. Set PR00 with alt. calc. type formula, which sets the value of PR00 to be equal to the subtotal B. The routine (created with transaction VOFM) is: RV64A901 FORM FRM_KONDI_WERT_600. XKWERT = KOMP-WAVWR. ENDFORM.

The pricing procedure than looks like that: Step 1 VPRS statistical, subtotal B, reqt 4 Step 2 PR00 Altcty 600

Customer discounts on effort only
-----Original Message----Subject: Customer discounts on effort only Hi All, We have a requirement of giving a discount to customer based on the total amount invoiced so far (across financial years). Where do we set this up? We have seen so far the discounts are calculated based on the value of the current invoice. The discount should be on a graduated scale basis for example 0 - 100000 No discount 100000 - 200000 5% 200000 - and above 10% This means that discount would only start after the customer's net sale value crosses 100000. For example, if the customer has been billed for 99000 and the current invoice is for 3000, a discount of 5% should be given on 2000 i.e. 100. Another complication is that, the discount is not based on the total amount billed so far, but only on the effort billed and not on reimbursements (like airfares, living expenses, visa charges, beeper charges etc). The discount applies only to the effort and not to the reimbursements. In the above example (invoice of 3000) say the effort billed is only 1500, the rest being reimbursements. The discount is only on the 500. (the rest being taken up by the lower limit for eligibility of 100000) For example the customer might have been billed say 150000 so far but actual effort billed might be only 90000, the rest being reimbursements of actual costs and hence the customer is not eligible for the discount. Kindly help, -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Customer discounts on effort only

Hi, The solution for this is Using rebate condition types and suitable condition records. Of this to handle your first problem that is the rebate has to be applied only on the "effort" you have to set up a line in the pricing procedure which gives the rebate basis i.e the value to be used for rebate cond types. This I believe solves your problem of rebate only on effort. Your second problem i.e the discount should start getting applied automatically when it reaches the first scale for which the values span few financial years. This I am not really sure whether it can be made possible in the invoice itself. But a work around is not giving the discount directly in the invoice but settling it against the rebate agreements by Credit notes periodically. Hope it helps. Thanks -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Customer discounts on effort only Hi Arent we looking at rebate agreeement. That appears to be a straightaway solution to your problem. You activate the sales organization and the payer for that Regards -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Customer discounts on effort only I am in SAP R/3 rel.30F. We have 2 options to meet your requirement. 1. Using scale in condition type ( tcode V/06 ), choose scale basis G.Scale based on a formula ( be: your based amount is invoice ). Define scale formula. You need ABAPER to define it. 2. Using routine in Alt.calc.type ( tcode V/08 , Maintain Pricing Procedure ). Here, you also need ABAPER to create routine.

PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. LOGISTICS GENERAL ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. ACCOUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT Transaction Code: VOPA 6) Assign the Partner Functions to the Partner Procedure for the Sales Document Header . 1) Establish Partner Functions for the Commissionee(s) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. CONTROL ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 3) Create a Partner Procedure for the Commissionees Menu Path: TOOLS ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS ->. LOGISTICS BASIC DATA: BUSINESS PARTNERS >. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 4) Create New Customer Account Group(s) for Commission Agents Menu Path: TOOLS ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. PARTNER FUNCTIONS ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. GOTO ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. CUSTOMERS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. you have to follow below steps. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 2) Assign the Partner Functions to Partner Procedures Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->.hope this help -----End of Message----- Steps to Create Commission for Agent For creating commission agent. DEFINE ACCOUNT GROUPS AND FIELD SELECTION FOR CUSTOMER Transaction Code: OVT0 5) Assign the Partner Functions to the Customer Account Group(s) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. ENVIRONMENT ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->.

ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 The following code should be inserted into program MV45AFZZ to allow the system to re-execute pricing if the user makes a change to the relevant partner function (alteration. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. PRICING ->. Basic Functions ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. MAINTAIN ACCESS . ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 10) Edit RV60AFZZ . CUSTOMIZING ->. Sales and Distribution >. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->.Menu Path: Tools ->. DICTIONARY Transaction Code: SE11 9) Edit MV45AFZZ ± userexit_pricing_prepare_tkomk (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. 13) Add the KOMKAZ Fields to the Pricing Field Catalog (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->. Partner Determination ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->. Business Engineer ->. Customizing ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->.userexit_new_pricing_vbkd changing new_pricing (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 11) Edit MV45AFZB . DEFINE ACCESS SEQUENCES ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. Define Partner Functions Transaction Code: VOPA 7) Assign the Partner Functions to the Partner Procedure for the Sales Document Item (OPTIONAL) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 8) Edit the Pricing Communication Structure (KOMKAZ) to Hold the New Functions (Client Independent) Menu Path: Menu Path: TOOLS ->. deletion). SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. addition. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->.userexit_pricing_prepare_tkomk (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->.

DEVELOPMENT ->. MAINTAIN CONDITION TYPES Transaction Code: V/06 17) Add the Condition Type to the Pricing Procedure Menu Path: TOOLS ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. MAINTAIN ACCESS SEQUENCES Transaction Code: V/03 15) Create an access sequence containing the new tables (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. we remain least interested in creating our own Condition Types. Whenever we define our pricing procedures. DEFINE CONDITION TYPES ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->.. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. MAINTAIN ACCESS SEQUENCES Transaction Code: V/07 16) Create a new condition type Menu Path: TOOLS ->. ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 SD Questions About Pricing Condition The Most Important Tips in Pricing For SAP SD Module to crack interviews. PRICING ->. DEFINE AND ASSIGN PRICING PROCEDURES ->. DEFINE ACCESS SEQUENCES ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. PRICING ->. CUSTOMIZING ->.. PRICING CONTROL ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->. PRICING ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. DEFINE ACCESS SEQUENCES ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->.SEQUENCES Transaction Code: OV24 14) Create Condition Tables (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->.Condition . PRICING ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. MAINTAIN PRICING PROCEDURES Transaction Code: V/08 11) Create Commsission Report ZZCOMMISSION (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->.

But when I was entering the PR00 at VK11 it is accepting it.But you see there is the difference between the technical view of it for transfering the data from document field and condition field. So for that purpose we have to use the following T-Codes respectively : "V/05".if you go through the menu path you will get the vk 31 as condition record from the tamplets whereas vk11 as simple condition record.) & then assign that Pricing Procedure with " Sales Area.This feature is given to enhance the system's performane and not to create the duplcation of the work for each condition type. using T-Codes is more smarter than following paths through IMG screen.Tables & Access Sequences.utsavmukherjee143@hotmail. KA02. Also to inform that. "V/06" & "V/07". Difference between header and item condition . we just define our own pricing procedures by using the existing condition types (i. Difference between VK11 and VK31 . Now it will become easy to create the same. But we also need to know about the Condition Tables. What we do is. K007. This means you can have same condition record for different condition types. mentioned in our Pricing Procedure by using the T-Code "VK11". Now when I was entering the PR00 in VK31 it shows error Table 304 is not defining for the condition type PR02. K004. What is the difference between Header condition and Item condition? I know item condition applies to each item in a sales document.This is because if you see this ac seq cointains two accessses 20 and 30 having the same table no. What is the difference of VK11 and VK31 (condition records)? My condition type is PR00 and Access sequence is PR02.e: PR00. After that we put the values against each Condition Types.so you can not maintain the data at VK31. Again system is not allowing to store the record in the vk31 for the condition type pr00 and access sequence pr02. In VK11 you can store condition record for more than one condition type. Document Pricing Procedure & Customer Pricing Procedure " . Header condition can only be applied to an entire document. And in this access sequence table 304 is available. Utsav Mukherjee .as YOU CORRECTLY SAID HEADER CONDITION IS APPLICABLE FOR THE WHOLE DOCUMENT where . KF00 etc. Condition Types & Access Sequence Creation.

Arvind Rana In pricing procedure there are column such as requirement. accurals. PR00: req 2 ie item relevant for pricing VPRS/EKO1: req 4 ie cost Rebate BAO1 Req 24/Req 25 etc 2. Subtotal: this represents where a which table a value is stored.How I can accomplish the following: Be able to DISALLOW Z0BP Condition type to be negative ( Invoice Block) You can modify condition type from customising. SAP SD Tips by : Vishwajit Disallowing Condition Types . What are these and where we calculate all these values which we put. a) In one you can duplicate the same value throughout the document for each item.Say discount 2% at header level which is also applicable to all the items b)Second is the accumulation of the values of all the item at the header level. Eg. You have two different types of the header conditions. Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing->Pricing Control->Define Condition Types->Maintain Condition Types Change condition type ZOBP's plus/minus indicator to "A" which means only positive is allowed. *-.Ex-Say fright is dependent on the total weight of all the items in the documents then header condition adds on weights of all items and calculates the record accordingly. which can be processed for further calculation. Requirement: Denoted by nos and maintained in VOFM. And so obviously header condition can not have the condition record and hence access sequence. 1.type configuration. sub total altclty. this is a condition required for a particular condition type to be executed.as item is for item.as earlier explained for the weight/fright. . altbv. These differenes are controlled through the indicator of group condition in the cond.

. 4.Please follow steps in below sequenceTry to add the filed from the field catalog. for PR00. 3 Alternate Calculation type: this is also denoted by numbers and maintained in VOFM. Alternate base value: Denoted by no. *-. that is the base value based on which the order value is to be calculated changes. Accruals: Accruals are maintained for rebate agreements. and maintained in VOFM. that is calculation is done as per unit price. Eg. an alternate base value is confihured. if the pricing scale is maintained and pricing for 45 units comes under the scale of $100 per unit. Here I'm giving a simple guide to add fields to the Pricing Field Catalogues: For example you want to use field PSTYV ('Sales document item category') that is included in structure KOMP ('Pricing Communication Item') as a key for a condition table. if this value is to be used for credt check of a customer. the order value comes out to be $4500. one the rebate for certain amount is settled the amount from the accruals get deducted.. each unit is charged $100 per unit. it constitutes the total accumulated value which customer has earned through rebate.Eg. Eg. In case the required combination field is not there.Nitin Add a Field To New Condition Table in Pricing Add a field to a new condition table in Pricing (Condition Technique):I will explain you the process with below example. 5.. if the client wants calculation type to be based on volume or wieght. you can add the field through the following process to filed catalog and create the condition table. we mark the subtotal as A. the base value is 45 units. It is most common that one or other time we need to use this function while configuring multi tasking & complex Pricing Architecture. . but if the client wants a standard base value in some casesto be assumed inspite of maintaining the scale. alternate calculation type can be configured. Suppose for 45 units .

Supply the new field you defined by including the following source code line in USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP: MOVE xxxx-PSTYV TO TKOMP-ZZPSTYV.sales document item category' and as a field label.When you create a condition table (Transaction V/03). Choose 'Conditions: Allowed fields' and include ZZPSTYV as a new entry. Call up structure KOMPAZ in the ABAP Dictionary (Transaction SE11) in the change mode and make the following entry: Component Component type: ZZPSTYV ZZPSTYV Save. PSTYV are the other terms which we need to know about. 2. field PSTYV was included in structure KOMP. 4. KOMK. field catalog. Choose PSTYV as a domain. Call up Transaction SPRO. however. In order processing you find the user exit in Include MV45AFZZ.As a short text. KOMP. Navigate to 'Sales and Distribution -> Basic Functions > Pricing -> Pricing Control' and execute 'Define Condition Tables'. KOMG. Reason and Prerequisites: For technical reasons. KOMKAZ. check and activate the change you made. for example. Consider that you can also use this note as a help if you want to use other customerspecific fields as key fields in a condition table. however. Condition access. Note:Because of the change in structure KOMPAZ. you can use. you can use the field labels of PSTYV. not in structure KOMG ('Allowed Fields for Condition Structures'). 6. the system does not propose the field in the field catalog. KOMPAZ. 5. check and activate your entries. Call up the ABAP Dictionary (Transaction SE11) and create data type ZZPSTYV. 3. Note:Now you can use field ZZPSTYV as a key field when you create a condition table Axxx. to add Fields. Proceed as follows: 1. field ZZPSTYV is now known in structures KOMG and KOMP because structure KOMPAZ is included in both structures. allowed fields. 'ZZ . .Save. and in billing document processing you find it in Include RV60AFZZ.

RB00 . *-. use structure KOMKAZ instead of structure KOMPAZ and USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMK instead of USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP. Examples of header condition.Absolute or numeric value which applies to all items. This amount is applicable to all items. these conditions are to be entered manually and get distributed automatically and the basis for distribution are taken from the NET VALUE of items mentioned at item level. 1. *-.Vivek Chokshi What is the difference between group condition and header condition? Group Condition: You can use this is feature of a condition type to apply price or discount for a material based on common property. . . Header Condition: This is a manual condition which you apply to header (Condition screen) of a sales document. Whenever any Header Condition is used. You maintained a discount based condition record fbased on material group ( = 01 for example).For header fields. .Numeric value or Absolute value. see Transaction SPRO via the path 'Sales and Distribution -> System Modifications -> Create New Fields (Using Condition Technique) -> New Fields for Pricing' and OSS Note 21040.HA00 . You maintained scales also. . When we go to the conditions section in a sales order. For more information.% Based Header Condition. Usage of this feature is to apply price / discount for a specific group of materials. it overrides the PR00 condition type.Manoj Mahajan Header Condition and Group Condition What are header conditions? Header conditions are those which appear in the header level of any sales order. here we add these conditions.HB00 . where the details of pricing is mentioned.

50 51 . Process a sales order for a customer with these three material with different quantities. If you have not activated the group condition feature. 3. 110.12 No's Rs.3 No's ITEM 3 .00 Rs. *-.Tsr 5. 4. system add the quantities of items which have material group = 01.25 No's ITEM 2 . Create 3 materials. 2.10 11 . Check the outcome. Discount ITEM 1 . 100. 105.Qty 1 . While calculating the discount.00 Rs.00 etc. Is it clear now. In the above example total quantity is = 109. 2. System apply a discount of Rs. 105.00 ITEM 3 . 3. Just try a sales order and see the out come Procedure to Test: 1.00 to each item irrespective of the individual quantities. Maintain Material Group of each item is same. 110.150 Discount Rs.62 No's Rs. Create a condition record for this condition type with scales. 105. 115.27 No's Rs. You are creating a sales order for a customer with five different items with different quantities as below ITEM 1 .12 No's ITEM 4 . system determines the discount value based on individual item quantity which is as below.00 ITEM 4 . Activate the condition type as a group condition.62 No's All the material is having the material group = 01. Steps Involved In Condition Technique . 100.27 No's ITEM 5 .00 5. because of this group condition. 4.3 No's Rs. 105.25 No's Rs.00 ITEM 5 .00 ITEM 2 .

Always remember that your Procedure Determination has only Basic Price as Condition Type 6. Now comes your Pricing Procedure where you include include Condition Types and format. Lets say it depends on Customer and Material. Do not forget to mention the Range (From To) while creating your Pricing Procedure. Distribution Channel. Step 4. Define your Access Sequence and include the above Table in your Access Sequence Step 3. . Discount. 2.Create Customer . Step 5.. check your Fields and ensure that they appear with any warning (Highlighted in Red) 4.Ensure that you have the right Document Pricing Procedure from here 3. There is a table 5 which already has Customer and Material so we can now copy and rename it or use the same table in our Pricing Procedure. Define/Choose your Table (with the requirement parameters that influence the price) Step 2. XD01 . Maintain Condition Records for your Condition Types I guess you can make it 8 Steps by dividing some of the main steps. With this understanding now we will start with the Table where we will pass the above parameters. T Code VOK0 Step 1. While Creating Access Sequence. Its always better to copy the Price Types provided by SAP. Now comes Procedure Determination where you specify the Document Pricing Procedure and Customer Pricing Procedure along with Sales Organisation.Always ensure that you pick the right Customer Pricing Procedure from here.What are the 8 steps involved in condition technique? By: Rohit Joshi It starts with an understanding of the factors that influences the Price. VA01 .Sales Order . Few important things to note is following. 1. Step 6. Freight and Tax) and include your Access Seq. Define your Condition Type (There are four Price Types Basic Price. Do not forget to mention your Access Sequence while defining your Condition Type 5.

Freight (HD00) . Suppose if two materials of same matl grp have discounts for 100 qty and above but in PO if the two matls are bieng procured for 50 qty then they cant avail discounts but if group condition is selected then the sum of the quantity of both matl of same matl group is considered (50 + 50) and discount can be availed for 100 qty. . I maintained two line items in the Sales Order. Header conditions are entered manually in order processing.Order value (HM00) Header Condition: If this condition is marked as a header condition.I made most of the mistakes that appear above. R/3 includes the following header conditions: . it is possible to enter the condition type in the header condition screen.Absolute discount (HB00) .Automatic pricing does not take header conditions into account. Sales Order Freight Condition In Header Condition ERP SAP ==> SD SAP Common questions: We are using the Freight in Header Condition. Checks for changing the condition manually are unaffected by this. The nature of header condition is that whatever value you are giving in sale order / billing. If group condition is selected then the discount percentage or quantity is applicable for the total sum of the quantity in the PO for those materials belonging to the same material group. How it is happening? Any formula is there? Header Conditions . Group Condition: Group conditions are helpfull incase of discounts.Percent discount (HA00) . you can not create condition records for them in the standard system. Hope it helps. it will be distributed proportionately. Further Group condition: Indicates whether the system calculates the basis for the scale value from more than one item in the document. So the Header freight is splitting irregularly for two line items (in item conditions) . line item wise.

317112 Behavior of conditions w/ calculation rule B changed . . you can see that the condition type . It will be proportionately distributed on each item on the basis of weight. Since this is a particularly good price. solution is in the below Notes: . this discount is to be excluded from pricing. That is the standard behaviour of the header condition type. it will either split the header condition value to the items on pro-rata basis or it will just duplicate the header value to all the items.25144 Freight conditions during milestone billing What is meant by condition exclusion for Condition types and records? Condition Exclusion The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing in sales documents.field Group condition is selected Normally Freight Header condition like condition type "HD00" is calculated on the basis of weight. Some customers receive a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. However.485740 Conditions with fixed amount in copy activities To achieve what you wish (absolute amount). possibly irrespective of different weight which may not be logical.25020 Value changes during over/underdelivery . To do this. a specific customer can buy the material for 100 USD. the customer should not also have a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. What you are experiencing with Fixed Amount Header conditions is standard behaviour. This is a Manual condition and you have to enter it in the header screen.84605 Transfer absolute amount condition to billing doc. Therefore. you must follow two steps: . Material 4711 costs 150 USD. If you will uncheck the group condition field.876617 FAQ: Header conditions / Header condition screen . Please see below Notes: . the same freight amount will be copied to each item.If you access V/06 and the header condition type. Based on whether the group condition field is ticked on or off.does not have any access sequence .

A condition exclusion group is merely a grouping of condition types that are compared to each other during pricing and result in the exclusion of particular condition types within a group or entire groups. with condition type PR00) when defining a condition type in SD Customizing .Sales & Distribution . By using µcondition exclusion groups¶ you can ensure that the customer does not receive all the discounts. but instead only receives the best of the available discount condition types.g. The condition exclusion indicator is not valid for condition supplements. Menu path ± IMG . only for material 4711) in the detail screen of a condition record (in the Condition exclusion field) You must set a condition for the discount in the pricing procedure in Customizing for sales.Basic functions ± pricing ± condition exclusion ± condition exclusion for groups of conditions (OV31). Condition Exclusion Group ± In any normal situation there could be more than one condition type in a pricing procedure offering a discount to a customer. Should the discounts be automatically determined.for all condition records of a condition type (e. If for example. This means that if a condition record contains condition supplements they will be taken into account during pricing. It is important to note that the condition types you want the system to compare must exist in the pricing procedure and must have valid condition records created for them. . a sales order is created using the pricing procedure that the exclusion group is assigned to.for an individual condition record (e. there is the risk that the customer will receive all the relevant discounts and thus purchase the product for a lower price than he should.g. You can do this in two ways: If you want to set the condition exclusion indicator a follows then you specify it: . If this condition is set. you can see that the condition offering the most favorable discount to the customer is represented in the pricing procedure. Condition 2 is available in the standard R/3 System.You must set a condition exclusion indicator for the price. the discount is not valid if the condition exclusion indicator is set.

After completing the assignment of the condition types to the exclusion group. After selecting the pricing procedure for which you want the condition exclusion to be active.For instance. select the folder µExclusion¶ where you can assign the relevant condition exclusion procedure to the relevant condition exclusion group. . condition type K007 has offered a discount of 10% off the sale price or a real value of $30. Otherwise. The system then takes the best discount for the customer between the two. the system will merely find the first condition record and stop searching for other records. while another condition type K005 has offered a real value discount of $10. The most important thing to remember here is to ³deactivate´ the Exclusive Indicator on the access sequence assigned to that condition type. where you can find a entry saying µInactive A condition exclusion item¶. freight condition types. There are four possible methods of using condition exclusion groups ± A ± best condition between the condition types B ± best condition within the condition types C ± best condition between the two exclusion groups D ± exclusive E ± least favorable within the condition type F ± least favorable within the two exclusion groups Configuring µCondition Exclusion Groups¶ First step is to define a µcondition exclusion group¶ by using a four character alpha numeric key. When using the condition exclusion group to find the best condition record in a condition type ± only use one condition type per exclusion group. which is K007 and makes the other discount K005 inactive. Next step is to assign the relevant condition types to the exclusion groups such as discount condition types. proceed with assigning the condition exclusion group to the relevant pricing procedure. This can be seen by double clicking on the condition type K005.

It informs you about the customer specific price agreements that were made within a certain period 2. 1. it is not widely used. Also V/LD is very useful. for every SOX audit done in the company.. Review price and discounts.. We can get the details as per our requirement i. Condition Index . Sales org/Dc/Division/Plant /material etc wise. From pricing report you can know which condition records exist for freight charges 3.all Z programs and Transactions.especially the change records for prices.What is difference between pricing report & condition index? Pricing Report: A Pricing report basically helps to get the list of all the pricing details which we have maintained in the system. The sales personnel use it to 1. Which condition records exist for customers in a particular region or country You can create your own pricing reports with V/LA. Inform potential buyer about the current price (and discounts) 3. get information for price (discounts) that existed at previous period (Say June 200X) 2. These kind of reports are generally required by the Top Management for periodical review // Finance team for price control // Master data team for record purposes // Process audits by Internal/external agency // Of late. This can be customized. Though all the above T Codes and there are many More standard SAP Reports have very high utility. Clients prefer customized reports when it comes to pricing reports ..e. We can get details of all the condition types including the scales. The selection criteria would be as per the Key combination which you select in the IMG screen You get following information from pricing report.

if you want to calculate the discount of 10 % for a material then you have to have a base value on which this 10% is calculated.Units of Measure. Now go to change(VK32). Now.Additional Data . Where does the standard condition base value (Default one) is determined for a Condition type? First check the Material Master UOM Conversion . This is a formula assigned to a condition type in order to promote an alternate base value for the calculation of the value. system will give the discount to the first 10 orders. If you have to calculate price of a material then you have to have a base value for it. Condition base value is a concept used in pricing procedure and actual term used is alternate condition base value. . in additional data put "maximum number of orders" as 10.g. You have to mark the "condition index" check box in the condition type and you have to activate the index in customization. You may also create the condition record for discount through VK31. Here you can put value 10 and save it. This is maximum number of order field. So you create a routine which will do the mathematical operations in the routine and derive you a value which is now used as the base value for calculating the condition value for a particular condition type. you don't want to take the base value and take other value as base value which are derived on some formula. For e. Second. You can set the discount for fast ten orders through "condition update". in the condition record. It becomes easier and faster to search for condition records for a customer or material just like it become easier to search a topics in the book with help of index. Normally you take the condition value of the base price of the material to calculate the value. Now. you will find a column "N". scroll to the right.Condition index is very useful for searching the condition record for a customer. First. in your discount condition type(V/06) activate the "condition update" check box.

For the number of units ordered depending on the condition amount mentioned this value is derived. 3. 2. Conditional base value When a value is derived for a condition type. requirement in pricing procedure? 2) Where do we define value for alternative condition base value and alternative calculation type so that system picks up different value. condition base value. 3. It is a routine which is assigned to the condition type in the pricing procedure. Conditional amount This is nothing but the unit list price what you are mentioning for the line item. Go to transaction V/08 here you select pricing procedure then go in to the control data of the pricing procedure here you can find Alter native Condition Base Value in the 14th column of the pricing procedure control data. this can be used to calculate complex tax structures. . 1) What is the role of alternative calculation type. when the value for alternative condition base value and alternative calculation type is mention in pricing procedure? **Alternative Calculation Type:** This function allows you use a formula as an alternative in finding the value of the condition type. What is the difference between: 1. Conditional base value 2. Conditional amount 1. Conditional value. instead of standard condition technique. based on certain calculation this value is taken as base.As per my understanding there is Alternative Condition Base Value. Conditional value.

a header discount of $30 results in the following discounts: Item Value Volume . Rounding Off Condition Not Appearing In Sales Order In sales order Diff condition type is not coming. This can be used to specify that the condition type should only be accessed if the customer has a low risk credit. distributed in the standard system according to the cumulative value of the items. Requirement This function is used to assign a requirement to the condition type. but in pricing procedure I've assigned the requirement as 013. . when checked in analysis it says requirement 013 is not fulfilled. 1 $1000 2 cbm 2 $500 4 cbm Stand. If the system distributes the absolute header discount according to volume based on the Alternative formula for condition base value . alt. disc. This requirement can be used to exclude the system from accessing the condition type and trying to determine the value. for example.Alternative condition base value The alternative condition base value is a formula assigned to a condition type in order to promote an alternative base value for the calculation of a value. Volume disc. alt CBV-4.cal type-16.(With Formula) $20 $10 $10 $20 Condition formula for alternative calculation type Alternative formula to the formula in the standard system that determines a condition. Example An absolute header discount is.

Please refer to the following documentation for requirement 013: RE LV61A013 Title Rounding as per Table T001R Purpose This is an example of a pricing requirement. Example A company has the requirement to carry out rounding for certain company code and currency combinations. Table T001R stores the rounding rules for company code and currency combinations. the user has configured the SAP delivered condition type DIFF to calculate the difference when rounding occurs. This type of formula can be used to influence the value shown for the condition in pricing. This requirement can be assigned to the condition type in the pricing procedure that is used to calculate the difference when rounding. Here maintain the rounding unit which will be stored in Table T001R. then in the t-code ob90 you can maintain that. This requirement is met if an entry has been made in the 'Unit to be rounded up to' field in Table T001R. . The user also assigns pricing requirement '13' to the condition type DIFF in the pricing procedure so that the condition is only calculated when a corresponding entry has been maintained in the table T001R. Please check the customizing table T001R. In the document pricing procedure. This information is stored in Table T001R. Go to v/08 maintain in condition base value 16 routine. the difference is only calculated when necessary. Purpose This is an example of a condition value formula. Using this requirement. or try this go to IMG path --> SAP Netweaver --> General Settings --> Currencies --> Define rounding rules for currencies. A condition value formula is assigned to a condition type or value line in the pricing procedure.

Where I can do setting of rounding profile for a new created condition type? 1) Create Rounding rule ( Unit of measure rounding rules ) Path : Materials --> SPRO Quantity Optimizing and Allowed --> Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Management Unit of Measure Rounding Rules --> Logistics Units of Measure Here give new rounding rule and % rounding up and down values 2) Create Unit of measure groups Path : Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Materials Management --> SPRO Unit of Measure --> Quantity Optimizing and Allowed Logistics Units of Measure Groups Create new group for YD and ROL 3) Dynamic rounding profile . This type of formula can be used to influence the value shown for the condition in pricing. the condition value will always be rounded using T001R.g.base value Round according to T001R Purpose This is an example of a condition value formula. When formula '17' is assigned to a condition type. A condition value formula is assigned to a condition type or value line in the pricing procedure. plus 5 or 10 or 100 units) that can be defined in T001R for company code / currency combinations.Formula '16' was delivered along with condition type DIFF to support the rounding unit rules that can be defined in T001R for company code / currency combinations. In-17 c. the system computes the rounded value and assigns the difference to the condition type DIFF. Formula '17' was delivered so that a condition value could be rounded off according to the rounding unit rules (e. Condition type DIFF was delivered to perform the rounding at the end of the pricing procedure with the total value. Using formula '16'.

and then write the ABAP code to transfer the data in the field from the transaction tables to the communication structure. This means that the field you require cannot be used in pricing because there is no communication of this field from the transaction to the pricing procedure via the communication structures. you need to add this field to the KOMK or KOMP structures. The field catalog is a structure (KOMG) that consists of two tables (KOMK and KOMP). KOMG New Fields in Pricing To use a field in pricing. one may find that a new field may not be in the list of available fields. such as VBAK and VBAP (for the order transaction). one creates a condition table. one can add the fields from the list of available fields. However. Follow these steps: . Many of the fields from these tables are available in the field catalog. The document and item data in SD is stored in data tables. Table KOMG contains the fields of tables KOMK and KOMP. one must create new fields for pricing. If you require a field that is not in KOMG. and rounding rule which you have created. They are called KOM ³x´ because they are communications structures used to communicate the transaction data with the pricing procedure. it means that it is not in KOMK or KOMP.Path : Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Materials Management --> SPRO Maintain Rounding --> Quantity Optimizing and Allowed Logistics Units of Measure Profile Here give Rounding profile name and plant and click on Dynamic to create new profile In next screen give desc. To use a field not defined in the field catalog. For rounding profile. For this reason. These tables contain the header and item data for pricing respectively. Should the fields one requires not be included in the list of allowed fields. rounding off method as 2. Assign created Rounding profile in info record also UOM group Maintain minimum order qty as 1 Rol and Order unit as ROL in Info record In material master maintain conversion as 1 Rol = 3500 yards How To Create Field in KOMP. This condition table is created using the allowed fields from the field catalog.

System modification. . Since this relates to the material. write the ABAP code in user exit USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP in RV60AFZZ. You may have to use an ABAP skill to assist you. the field you add would be ZZWRKST. Sales and distribution. The base material is a field on the material master basic data screen and is defined as MARA-WRKST. After adding the field. For the billing transaction. Create the field in the KOMK (header data) and KOMP (item data) tables using the standard includes provided for this requirement. Write the code in the user exit to read the transaction data and transfer it to the KOM ³x´ structures. Create new fields (using the condition technique). write the ABAP code in user exit USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP in include program MV45AFZZ. Note When you add a field to these tables. so you need to put this code in both places. Let¶s say you need to use the ³base material´ to define a price and the base material is not in the pricing field catalog. If the field is from the item table (for example. it must start with ³ZZ. New fields for pricing. Adding the Field to KOMK and KOMP This process requires some knowledge of the ABAP dictionary and how to use the ABAP dictionary to create and change fields and tables. In ABAP. This field is not available in the field catalog and can be used in condition tables.´ Therefore. the order table VBAK). the order item table VBAP). 2. For the order transaction. generate the structure KOMP. Pricing occurs in the order and in the invoice. so you would add the field to the KOMPAZ include table. use the same domain as in the field in the original table MARAWRKST. when you add the field. Writing the ABAP Code The field in the communications structure will be blank unless the ABAP code transfers the data from the material master to the field KOMPZZWRKST. Menu Path The menu path here is IMG. you¶ll need to add it to the include table KOMPAZ in table KOMP. you¶ll need to add it to the include table KOMKAZ in table KOMK.1. If the field is from the header table (for example. it is at the item level.

Header . you would use the user exits that end with TKOMK.Financial Accounting .Goto .Field name: AcctAssgGr) have been filled in automatically. . Check whether the configuration in transaction VKOA have been done correctly. Assuming that one of the key combination is Account Assignment Group.Accounting sections .Header . you will have to check whether have the Account Assignment Group been input in the Customer Master (Billing tabstrips .Goto . Billing cannot be Release to Accounting This SAP message will appear if the system is unable to find the G/L codes match from the configuration in transaction VKOA No account is specified in item 0000001001 Message no. If you are writing the code for a field at the header level. F5 670 Diagnosis No account was specified for account type "S" in item "0000001001" of the FI/CO document. Check whether the billing document (VF03 . The ABAP code would select the Base material field from the material master table using the material from table VBAP/VBRP.Note : The TKOMP is for the item level.Field name: Acct assgmt group).Header . It would then transfer this field to the structure TKOMP from MOVE MARAWRKST to TKOMP-ZZWRKST. System Response The Financial Accounting program cannot process the document. Procedure A system error has probably occurred in the application you called up. The Account Assignment Group will be copied automatically into the sales order. Check whether the sales order (VA03 . Check the data transferred to item "0000001001" of the FI/CO document.Field name: AcctAssgGr) have been filled in automatically.

You can set the start variant via SE93 using the Change mode. Default Start Variant for VF04 There are two types of variant in VF04. Take note for One Time Customer. therefore. This is after clicking the Display Billing List Button. After creating your layout display variant. the system will not be able to determine the Account Assignment Group manually. the user have to input the Account Assignment Group manually into the sales order. then the user will have to maintained the Account Assignment Group manually either in the sales order or the billing documents. .If the customer master have not been maintained and the user have already input the sales order. you can set it by clicking :Settings -> Display Variant -> Administration Select the layout display variant you want and click :Edit -> Define default settings Condition Exclusion which will be determined in the billing document The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing. One Time Customer can be used by many customer. One is the selection variant before clicking the Display Billing List Button. The second variant is the Billing Layout display variant.

Define new document pricing procedure in SM30 . To create a condition exclusion procedure which will be determined in the billing document.For example: Material 4711 costs 150 USD. Therefore. and maintain copy control so that pricing is not copied from Sales Order. Assign the Billing Pricing Procedure in VOK8 for the Condition Exclusion Groups. Since this is a particularly good price. Assign new document pricing procedures to billing types in SM30 . Assign the procedure to the pricing schema. However. When billing document is being created just enter manually your new price and the pricing program logic will include only the higher price one. the customer should not also have a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. Some customers receive a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. Related Topics: Create/Modify Billing Document Type Steps for creating new or changing existing Billing Doc Type Get help for your SAP SD problems Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP SD Books SAP Sales and Distribution. excluding the rest that are lower price. To achieve this. Interview Questions Reference Books . a specific customer can buy the material for 100 USD. Certification. copy the standard pricing to a ZXXXX Pricing.V_TVFK_PR Define the Condition Exclusion Groups in OV31. Assign the Condition type for the Condition Exclusion Groups in OV32.V_TVKV for billing. this discount is to be excluded from pricing.

An F2 invoice. for example. (VBTYP 'M') can only be canceled with billing type S1 with VBTYP 'N' . use transaction VCHECKVOFA to check your configuration :1) Proforma billing types: If it is a proforma billing type. .. make sure that you maintain the copy control for the Billing Types: . mark the field. Indicates whether the system blocks automatic transfer of the billing document to accounting. 3) Cancellation billing document type partner functions A check is made to see if the cancellation billing document type partner functions are empty or if those that correspond to the billing type used are empty. During document processing. Next. you can manually transfer blocked billing documents to accounting by selecting: Billing -> Change -> Release accounting 2) Account determination procedure 3) Output determination procedure etc. the field must be blank and the account determination procedure must be empty. Some of the IMG stuff are :1) To block automatic transfer of the billing document to accounting. (VBTYP = U). After customizing.SAP Sales and Distribution Tips SAP SD Discussion Forum and Sales/Distribution Tips Steps for creating a new or changing an existing Billing Document Types Create/Change your Billing types configuration in VOFA.. A billing type with VBTYP '5' can only be canceled with the VBTYP '6' and vice versa. 2) Cancellation billing document types: : A check is made to see if the cancellation billing document type has the right VBTYP.

After that use transaction VCHECKTVCPF to check your Copy control customizing. G2 . Interview Questions Reference Books SAP Sales and Distribution Tips SAP SD Discussion Forum and Sales/Distribution Tips Billing Block will not worked if you did not assign it Define the possible block indicators in SM30 . Certification.Invoice Deliveries in VTFL e. F1 .Delivery F1 .g.Your Delivery Usually for copy control.V_TVFS and allocate them to the billing types concerned in SM30 .Your Sales Order Billing documents in VTFF e. you let the rest of the settings remains as SAP defaults.Sales documents in VTFA Target e. You only assign the new Billing Document Types.Invoice Source OR . .V_TVFSP.Debit Memo F1 .g.Invoice LF .Standard Sales Order ZOR . F1 .Invoice F1 . FI Link Between SAP SD.Invoice G2 .g.Debit Memo F2 . MM. Related Topics: Integration between SD.Invoice ZOR . MM & FI Get help for your SAP SD problems Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP SD Books SAP Sales and Distribution.

Define date description in SM30 . Allocate date category in SM30 . the customer is billed either a percentage of the entire project cost or simply a pre-defined amount. Billing Plan for Milestone Billing Milestone billing means distributing the total amount to be billed over multiple billing dates in the billing plan. Maintain Date Category for Billing Plan Type IN OVBJ. During sales order processing. 5.V_TFPLA_TY. you must be able to enter data to identify the individual milestones. sales document type in transaction VOV8. fields Billing Block. 4. .V_TVAP. Maintain date proposal for Billing Plan Type in OVBM. 3. item categories in SM30 . Billing plans for periodic billing and milestone billing plans for projectrelated milestone billing have different overview screens so that you can enter data relevant to your processing. Maintain billing plan types for milestone billing in OVBO. if so. You can auto block by :1. 2. which type of plan The type of billing plan that is determined at this point is set up in Customizing and cannot be changed in the sales document. As each milestone is successfully reached. For example. the system determines from the item category whether a billing plan is required and. by filling the fields Billing Block.V_TVTB. IMG configuration requires :1. or 2. for milestone billing.Your Billing Block will not worked if you did not assigned it to the desired billing types.

000 30. milestones are defined in a network along with planned and actual dates for the completion of work. Delivery-relevant order items for which a milestone billing plan applies are billed on the basis of the requested delivery quantity and not on the total of the confirmed quantities. Milestone billing is typically used for billing projects. The following figure shows an example of milestone billing where only the Contract have been billed : Order Item Turbine 100. 2.000 30.000 Billing Plan Billing date Status 01-10-94 01-03-95 01-04-95 01-05-95 Description Contract Assembly Maintenance Acceptance % 10 30 30 30 Value 10. Mark the schedule line and select Procurement details. Item -> Schedule lines. Define rules for determining the date in OVBS. 7. Assign Billing Plan Type to Sales Documents Type in OVBP.000 Billing Block x x x Milestone x x x x Billing x . In the SAP R/3 System. select 1. such as plant engineering and construction projects.000 30. proceed as follows: In one of the overview screens of the sales document. Each schedule item can be assigned to a network in a project. The connection between the project and the sales document item is made in the individual schedule lines of the item. 8. The milestones are also assigned to the billing dates in the billing plan.6. Such projects often include a series of milestones that mark the completion of different stages of the work. To display the project-related data for a schedule line. Assign Billing Plan Type to Item Categories in OVBR. Each milestone-related billing date is blocked for processing until the Project System confirms that the milestone is completed.

Billing plan processing includes the following functions: y y y y y y y y y y y Automatic creation of billing plan dates Pricing Billing block Billing index Billing status Billing rule for milestone billing Fixed dates in milestone billing Document flow Creating with reference Exchange rate determination Automatic Creation of Billing Plan Dates In Customizing for Sales. The system determines the schedule of individual dates based on general date information. always updated with the actual date of the milestone 3. you can specify whether the billing date is: 1. you control how the system automatically creates the schedule of dates in a billing plan.. This general date information is copied either from contract header data or from proposals in the billing plan type. if the date is earlier than the planned billing date for the date Explain what is Billing Plan.. Pricing Sales document items are billed as each billing date in the plan becomes due.01-06-95 Final invoice . The system determines the amount to be billed either from the condition records that are applicable to the item or from the values that are explicitly entered in the billing plan . . such as the start and end dates. updated with the actual date of the milestone. fixed 2. x Network/Activities Milestone Assembly Maintenance Acceptance Estimate 01-03-95 01-04-95 01-05-95 Actual 01-03-95 For each billing date in a milestone billing plan.

the system creates and updates a billing index. you can specify a billing rule. the system automatically sets a billing block for each billing date.for a particular billing date. For example. If a billing date is blocked for billing. The status indicates to what extent the billing has been processed for that particular date. The rule determines how the billing amount for the particular date is calculated. The price differences can be taken into account during final settlement. At this point the system removes the block. Billing Rule for Milestone Billing For every date in the milestone billing plan. the system copies this information into the index. Final settlement is not automatically proposed in the billing plan by the system. The block prevents processing for a particular billing date but does not necessarily affect any of the other dates in the plan. In addition. This block remains in effect until the project system reports back that the milestone in the corresponding network has been successfully completed. for example. After billing has been carried out successfully. price changes may take place after billing dates in the plan have already been processed. you can specify that the amount to be billed is a final settlement that takes into account billing that has not yet been processed. you must enter it manually during processing. the billing status is automatically set to µC¶. Billing index For every billing date in a plan. you can specify a percentage to be billed or an actual amount. Billing status The system assigns a billing status to each billing date in the plan. Billing block A billing block can be set for each date in a billing plan. In milestone billing. Fixed dates in milestone billing . This prevents a billed date from being billed again. For example. you can specify whether the billing amount is a percentage of the total amount or whether it is a fixed amount. In milestone billing.

When using a header billing plan. you can enter the number of an existing billing plan to serve as a reference during subsequent billing plan creation. If no exchange rate is entered for the the date or at item level. . for example.You can control for each date in a billing plan. If an exchange rate is entered both for the date in the billing plan and at item level in the exchange rate field. the system automatically proposes the reference plan and. If. Document flow After a particular date in a billing plan is processed for billing. Exchange rate determination In the billing plan with partial billing. all billing plans linked to this header billing plan are automatically updated. During sales order processing for items that require billing plans. if necessary. The document flow for the sales document displays the following data: Creation date Billing date Billed value y y y Creating with reference When you define a billing plan type in Customizing for Sales. the system updates the document flow for the corresponding sales document item. you can store a certain exchange rate for each date. The amount billed is the amount determined after using this exchange rate to convert from the local currency into the document currency. re-determines the billing dates (based on the current date rules) for inclusion in the new billing plan. you enter an exchange rate manually for the first date in the header billing plan. An exchange rate can also be stored at item level for the sales document (field: Exchange rate for FI on the Billing tab page. whether the date is fixed or whether the system copies the date from the planned or actual milestone dates in a project. This fixed rate is valid for all dates in the item billing plan for which no rate is specified in the billing plan. then the system uses the exchange rate used for invoice creation and it is forwarded to FI. then the system uses the rate specified for the date during billing. this is automatically copied to the corresponding dates for the item billing plans.

it is possible. In that field you will see the currently used routine.g.Invoice split criteria in billing document 36832 . Naina In trx VTFA (if your billing is sales order based) choose your billing type and SO type. Let's say you use routine 001.Invoice split in fields from the sales order Billing Spilt by Item Category Is it possible to split invoice Item category wise. the current date) must be entered (In VF04 : settings. Martishev Sabir Thank you for your reply.) In VF06 or background: variant with parametrization) to avoid an unwanted split due to the billing date. Create a modification of copy control routine for billing and use VBAP-PSTYV as an additional split criteria there. I mean If in sales order there is TAN and TANN then the invoice should split. Can you please tell me the exact steps what should I add under that(additional split criteria). . This OSS notes is very helpful :11162 .SAP Billing . FORM DATEN_KOPIEREN_001.Combine Billing for deliveries with different date When using transaction VF04 or Billing (background). there select your item categories and there select the field VBRK/VBRP data.is it possible? Naina Yes. With the help of your ABAP guy create a copy of that routine under a different number and add your lines of code. the date of the billing document (e. default data.

* Item data * VBRP-xxxxx = .. MODUL(3) VALUE '001'... VBRK-ZUKRI = ZUK. <...New line END OF ZUK.... * Additional split criteria DATA: BEGIN OF ZUK. PSTYV LIKE VBAP-PSTYV.. VTWEG LIKE VBAK-VTWEG.....* Header data * VBRK-xxxxx = .. END OF ZUK..... MODUL(3) VALUE '001'....... ENDFORM.. * Additional split criteria DATA: BEGIN OF ZUK.... ZUK-SPART = VBAK-SPART. ZUK-VTWEG = VBAK-VTWEG. <. SPART LIKE VBAK-SPART. * Item data * VBRP-xxxxx = ..... ZUK-PSTYV = VBAP-PSTYV... This is how it should look after modification: * Header data * VBRK-xxxxx = . ENDFORM....New line VBRK-ZUKRI = ZUK.. VTWEG LIKE VBAK-VTWEG. ZUK-SPART = VBAK-SPART.... ZUK-VTWEG = VBAK-VTWEG. .... SPART LIKE VBAK-SPART.

Procedure If the documents with an excessive number of items come from another application area (e.g. 1 with 950 items and the other with the rest. Martishev Sabir Maximum number of items in FI reached Message no. " How could this error be solved as none of your invoices are getting accounted in FI? To overcome this. Prepaid process possible -----Original Message----Subject: Prepaid process possible I am looking for information on how we could implement a prepaid process. you can configure the system to the effect that these documents are summarized in FI.After this routine is created and activated place it as the default copy control routine instead of the old ones. the corresponding accounting document is not created. the only way was to break the accounting invoices. The error is as follows: Maximum number of items in FI reached Message no. F5 727 If you hit the above erros when you create an invoice in SD. By "prepaid . System response FI documents have a 3-digit item counter that limits the number of items permitted per document. sales. order accounting). logistics. F5 727 Diagnosis The maximum number of items for an FI document ('999') has been exceeded.

It is also possible to code a user exit so that only certain customers will get the prepaid process.Customer sends to us his order .Once we have received his payment. . which implies the processing is "material" specific not "customer" specific.We post the payment we received earlier against this last invoice. As you see. we produce an invoice for him to pay . What we do now: . From what I understood it looks like the billing plan is handled based upon the item category.Once we receive the payment. this requires a lot of manual work and a lot of time is wasted to match all documents together.We receive the sales orders and produce a Pro Forma invoice from it. and send it to customer .We have defined a risk category "prepaid" which is assigned to our prepaid customer. This risk category automatically block the sales order for delivery. This can be done also with item category groups (can be used to determine what default item category that . I found information in online documentation about "down payments" (I imagine that our prepaid process could be a 100% required down payment) but it does not seem that it would work. There most be a more efficient way to handle this. if you create a new item category for the prepaid scenario.no further billing document is produced. you can select what item category (and process) to use at order entry. .If customer is set as "prepaid". anybody have any hints? -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Prepaid process possible Hi again! You are right! However.process" I mean: . we release the sales order for delivery . we release the sales order for delivery and produce the invoices.

(Change the billing in the item category to order related billing with no billing plan) 2. Create a new distribution channel and assign it to the company structure (plant. and item category group defaulting the new item category. Extend your material(s) with views for the new distribution channel and enter the "ZXXX" item category group in the field for sales item category group (I think it is on sales 2 screen but I am not sure. Also delivery copy control could be good to check. Now you should be able to create a sales order with the new distribution channel where the new item category is defaulted. Check that the sales order is completed when both billing and goods issue for the delivery is posted.should appear). can't access a system right now). Create a new item category group "ZXXX" or something of your choice with the description "Prepaid" or something like that. DC 10 could be the normal process and DC 20 the prepaid process. 3. sales org etc) 6. 4. Check copy control from sales document to billing document for the new item category. add or check entries so that you have the order type used. 5. Then you need to create the sales views in material master for DC 20 for all materials that should be possible to run in the prepaid scenario. In item category assignment. If not check the completion rule in the new item category. Good luck . This would mean that you either have different materialnumbers for the different processes or use different distribution channels in the sales order. and enter the "prepaid item category group in the sales item category group field in material master. Here is a proposal of customizing activities to achieve this: 1. Create a new item category as a copy of the normal item category used for nonprepaid sales.

Of Billing Items. . go to that Item Category functionality VOV7 and find if it is order or delivery related billing. maintaining data here is not enough alone to bring about a billing split by number of billing items. check have you completed the PGI for the delivery document or not. You must also go to copying control for order/delivery to billing document at item level under "Data VBRK/VBRP" and maintain routine 006 "individual invoice limited" or a similar routine that accesses the data maintained here.-----End of Message----- Restricting Number Of Items In Billing Doc How I can restrict number of items in an invoice? If I enter more than 8 items in a sales order and those items get copied into delivery doc then to billing doc. Next. You can restrict delivery with delivery tolerance. thereby causing invoicing of the desired. We may get more information on error. This is where you can define a maximum number of items allowed for all billing documents within a given sales organization. or Go to SPRO>>>IMG>>>Sales & Distribution>>>Billing>>>Billing Documents>>>Country-specific features>>>Maintain Maximum No. SAP SD Tips by : Amol Document Not Relevant For Billing How to resolve "Document not relevant for billing" error message? Check the detailed error log in VF01 screen. But our client want to restrict number items to 8 (max) in an invoice. Then. However.

Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas: Assign only required Sales Order Types to required Sales Area. Sales Document Item: *1. always copy as with reference to similar sales order. Formula for deriving item category: Sales Document Type + Item Category Group + Usage + Higher Level Item Category = Item Category Schedule Line: 1. So how I can solve this issue. Normal Sales Order Cycle:Step 1: Sales Document Type IMG > Sales and Distribution > Sales > Sales Documents > Sales Document Header: 1. Incase if required to create new. such as Inquiry. Sales Document Type:The sales document types represent the different business transactions. If possible use standard sales order. Combine sales organizations / Combine distribution channels / Combine divisions: Ensure to maintain these. *2. Assign Item Categories: If possible. go VTFL and check in your document type combination is maintained or not. 3. Define Schedule Line Categories: If possible use Standard Schedule Lines. If every thing is correct go and find with copy controls If it order related. Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types: A. use standard. Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents: Maintain number range with discussion with core team. if they are maintained item category is available or not. To create new sales order type. After delivery while creating billing document system showing error that no billing document is generated for material no 395. 2. else Sales Order creation will give error. . copy as from standard & maintain New. Quotation. go VTFA If it Delivery related. B. Define Item Categories: If possible use Standard Item Category.And after that go and check in the particular Sales order document type whether billing document types are maintained in the sales document or not. This will minimize selection of Sales Order Type as per sales area. Incase if required to create new. Sales Order. etc. copy as from standard & maintain New. Check if Item Category is checked for Billing or not.

Deliver to Billing. Step 2: IMG > Logistic Execution > Shipping > Deliveries > *1. Define Number Ranges for Deliveries: Ensure to maintain number range. Note: Ensure that Copy Control settings are done Sales Order to Sales Order (QT --> OR): VTAA Sales Order to Delivery (OR --> LF): VTLA Sales Order to Billing (OR --> F1): VTFA Delivery to Billing(LF --> F2): VTFL Billing to Sales Order (F2 --> RE): VTAF The configuration differs from scenario to scenario & requirement of the client. Assign Schedule Line Categories: If possible. *2. Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents: Maintain relevant copy controls such as Sales Order to Billing. the billing document will be passed on to the FI consultants.2. Define Item Categories for Deliveries: If possible use Standard Item Categories for Delivery Type. Define Billing Types: If possible use Standard Billing Type. what happens if there is a cancellation? How to perform cancellation for this process: Billing --> Goods receipt --> Sales Order ? (Is this the correct reversal to perform in order for cancellation?) After performing the process Sales Order --> Outbound Delivery (Goods issue) --> Billing. But if there is a . etc. Define Number Range For Billing Documents: Ensure to maintain number range. Define Delivery Types: If possible use Standard Delivery Type. 2. Incase if required to create new. Procedure To Cancel Billing Documents ERP SAP ==> SD SAP Tickets from users: After the following process: Sales Order --> Outbound Delivery (Goods issue) --> Billing. copy as from standard & maintain New. Formula for deriving Schedule Line: Item Category + MRP Type / No MRP Type. use standard. Incase if required to create new. copy as from standard & maintain New. Incase if required to create new. 3. copy as from standard & maintain New. *3. Step 3: IMG > Sales and Distribution > Billing > 1.

so it will reverse all the updated accounting entries. this billing doc. 2. When you create another sales order the number will skip to the next one i. once it is reversed. Now put a reason for rejection in the line item/s. You can only reject the Sales order if there are existing transations: 1. You can delete the Sales Order if transaction have been done: In VA02 .VL09 Then go to VL02N and remove the picking qty and make it blank then Goto VA02 and cancel the order. Now you need to cancel the Post goods Issue using VL09. Once the delivery is deleted. For example . if your sales order number is 1055 and you have deleted or cancelled that sales order.cancellation then. It is not advicable delete a sales order. In the FI customer open line items. then that sales order number doesn't exist in the database and you cant create another sales order with the same order number 1055.e. the order will get closed.VF11 Cancellation of delivery . 3. the delete the delivery using VL02N. which will have a accounting document also that will also get cancelled. 1056. the sales order will be open. After deletion / cancellation of that sales order that order doesn't exist in the database. just enter into the sales order goto menu path -> Files-> Cancel or delete option will be there will be there. Match Billing Cancel Document How to find out the link between the original and cancelled billing documents? Goto to tcode SE16 Table: VBRK . Cancellation of billing . First you need to cancel the billing document using T-code VF11. and reject the order.

this is used to do batch job.Field: VBRK-ZUONR . your vairant will run. then it will take you to another screen. using JOB WIZARD. In the ABAP Progamme Name give SDBILLDL.. Schedule VF04 For Individual Billing Run SAP Functional ==> SD In SAP How to schedule billing to be run automatically? You can create individual Billing documents in VF04. now you batch job will run at a specified time which you mentioned.g. 2. which are created. (in job name field) (in the first screen) the continue for further steps. in SD Document field. and billing documents will be created. click on Job Wizard which is on the screen.. proceed for the following process 1. And you can also see all the billing documents numbers. using Cntr Button. after an hour.Now Click on GOTO -> Variant -> Save as Variant. Usually it failed when user tried to cancelled current period with previous date. if you dont know any thing also. with out any saving of each and every billing document. and click on individual billing. or a specific day like so. for which you want to create billing documents e. 4. test. you can do the entire process. like immediate. Then all the deliveries will go for billing individually in a single run. Continue further to complete the task. goto VF04. Select all the deliveries which you want to create billing documents.Assignment (this field link the original and cancelled billing documents) Cancel billing documents must be successfuly released to accounting. just you need to give your variant name. e. 5. then once you comple this process. 3.g. and save it. If you want to do a batch job for billing. give the variant name. if you mentioned as immediately. It will take you to different steps. (this is the programme used to create billing documents) continue to give the specified time which you want to run this batch job. give delivery 1 to 10. goto SM36. in the selection screen Delivery document range. No need to select single delivery each time. .

This program finds out all the orders or deliveries or both which are due for billing and it will trigger the billing creation. email etc) in total for any document created in any of the applications. RSNAST00 is a program which is related to output related activities. SDBILLDL is the program for Billing due list. Explain The Concept of Resource Related Billing Please explain to me the concept of resource related billing and its different between periodic and milestone. The details are read and stored in the database table NAST. code SM37. VBRP. VBUP. It reads tables like VBAK.code ODP1) 2) Specify the usage (i) Billing & Result Analysis (RRB) . LIPS etc and the created billing documents are stored in tables VBRK. Difference between the RSNAST00 and SDBILLDL program. VBUK. Using this program. In what kind of business scenario do we use it? and what are the settings required to use it? Periodic billing is used when you want to bill the customer at different points of time based on the periodicity or progress of the work. You can check the status of your batch job using t. we can schedule the creation of outputs (PDFs.6. LIKP. Steps to be followed: 1) Configure DIP Profile (T. Milestone billing can be used for this type of billing purposes when you want to have billing control from the project. Dynamic Item Processor (DIP) profile is used for the resource related billing. The same program is customised for each applications using programs like SD70AV1A which are also used for the same purpose but only for sales orders. VBAP. Plese ensure that all the deliveries are perfect. meaning there is no billing block or any thing. Resource billing is based on the resource consumption for the particular activities.

In criteria allocate the activity type for the specific material. Define% 8) Sources --> Selection Criteria: This would display all characteristics. No material appears in DMR/CMR. In the material master costing view.code VA01) 15) Book CATS 16) Execute DP91 to view Sales Pricing Common Errors: AD01-155: Error during material determination for sales document item.(ii) Request Quotation (Sales Pricing) 3) Specify (i) Sales Document Type (PS2) (ii) SD Doc Type CMR 4) In Sales Order Type --> Sales Order Category . IX-057: No cost management is provided for sales document (contract) item.code GS01 10) Material Determination --> Initially create material with "Material Type = Service" 11) The service material should be mentioned in the material determination 12) Criteria -. Go back to the service order and check there are actual costs . which we have defined in characteristics) 13) Create Project (T. (We can also use cost element. eg--> Activity Type 7) Then define sources. Select "Actual Cost" as we use actual cost for RRB. set the "Material Origin" checkbox (see OSS note 174382) No expenditure item found. Material Origin field was not checked in the Costing tab of the material master. Now in Activity Type -> Mention the activity type 9) If more activity type are being used then create set of activity type using T. This is usually because there is no requirements type assigned to the contract item (see procurement tab). cost center."L" (Debit Memo Request) 5) Document Pricing Procedure --> PS (Customer Project) 6) Select the billing usage and click on characteristics.code CJ20N) 14) Create Sales Order (T.

Where to checked? When you cancel a billing document. Lets handle it phase by phase.Check your DIP Profile. . CO Configuration: KL03: Check activity type validity dates KA03: Check cost element validity dates KA03: For labour. specifically the sources section to ensure you are not filtering out any dynamic items. So once you cancel the billing document it will create one cancellation Document and one reversal Accounting Document. 1. That means the cancellation billing document did not generate accounting document. check cost element category is 43 KA03: Check if Record qty flag is set on Indicators tab KA03: Check cost element assigned to your controlling area KP26: Check that activity type is linked to cost centre KP26: Check that there is a rate for the activity type/cost centre KP26: Check are you using the correct version Cancelled Billing Document Has No Accounting Document Real SD Support Question: I have cancelled a billing document through vf11. First Scenario Your accounting document not generated. VF02 Mode Click ³Release to Accounting" the Accounting documents not generated. you are actually creating a cancellation document. The cancellation document copies data from the billing document and transfers an offsetting entry to the accounting department. There is no need to cancel Accounting document which is created after cancel a billing document.

then OK Else 3.2. Then check Posting Block. Check with FI Consultant whether Accounting entries has been posted with reference to customer and Invoice. Finally check whether the billing document which you were cancelling that billing document generated accounting document or not. 4. If it has been checked then uncheck it and secondly also check in the F2 billing document type whether S1 cancellation billing document type has been assigned or not. Check Account assignment Procedure VKOA and check G/L account has been assigned. If it has not generated the accounting document then check the settings in OBA7 Retro Billing And Self-Billing Are retro billing and Self-billing referring to the same process? Answer: . Check with FI Consultant. This you can see in the document flow. Second Scenario If accounting documents gets generated and you use VF11 to Cancel the invoice. it should be unchecked. Check whether for the S1 billing document type Posting block has been checked or not. then automatically the posting document gets reversed and separate number will be assigned for those documents. If yes. If error found correct it Else 6. Check Whether you have assigned Accounting keys to the relevant condition types. Please Check this : SPRO--->Sales and Distribution-->Billing Documents-->Define Billing Types Select Billing type S1. 5.

Other debit memo of $200 (with ?_?_? reference) will remain open in system which may be . You will execute retro-billing process. Thus you will update your price conditions in VK12 for this material/customer to $90 with validity from Sep 01.Retro billing and Self-billing are entirely different processes and can be executed independently.Amount $1000 Invoice is sent to customer for $1000 on say Sep 20. Now the customer while paying will pay $800 as per its self-bill and the same would be settled against original invoice of $1000 and SB credit Memo of $200. 2099.you must maintain the 'use of order reason for retro-billing' in Order reasons configuration for this to work properly. This will hit the supplier system in form of EDI/Fax/Paper etc and on verification in system will show in Self-bill Monitor VSB1n. But as you have already invoiced the customer in past so to take care of the extra billing .e. 2099 RETRO-BILLING Now due to price negotiations price may change to $90 w. Customer may send a self-bill for the above case like $80 a piece. Let me explain using a very simple example: You sell 10 units of a material A for $100 per unit . You will go to VFRB and enter the selection criteria for the material and suitable dates. These documents will get attached to the original invoice Important to Note . system will provide you the list of candidate invoices to which this price reduction is applicable and hence you can simulate or even execute retro-billing after providing Cr/Dr memo type and order reason. On processing. 2099. SELF-BILLING Here customer raises invoices for itself.f Sep 01. Supplier does not send the invoice to customer. system will generate a credit memo of $200 for the customer and a debit memo for same amount with reference ?_?_?.

Exchange Rate Billing Documents In SAP billing process. As the rates picked in the sales order as default exchange rates maintained for the day.currency <-> Doc. I am facing the problem with the exchange rate. In the billing document there are 3 exchange rates. Solution: You can have the same exchange rate (OB08) in sales order to be in billing document: In Copy control VTFL at item category level -> PricingExchRate type to 'A'Copy from sales order Now. if the sales order is MTO and goods will dispatched after 2 months and within these 2 month the exchange rate got floated by a large amount and during the billing with VF01 t-code. the exchange rate will be something else.currency.currency. for Price Determination The determination of this exchange rate depends on the setting of TVCPFLP-PFKUR in customizing copy-control VBRK-KURRF Exchange Rate for the conversion Loc. For FI postings If there is a manual entry in the sales order field VBKD-KURRF (Goto -> Header -> . and make a large difference of amount at this instance. and I can¶t change it at that instance also.rate-acct.currency <-> Doc.' enter the exchange rate there manually. It will solve the problem as it will give me the billing amount in exact LC amount also. Is there is any provision in sap system so that I can change the exchange rate in the billing document and with this same exchange rate I can post the entries in accounting also. The billing document will be posted to the accounting after getting the money from the customer and the exchange rate will become something else at this moment also.cleared off by a retro billing run where supplier may reduce the price by $20 or take further action as needed. which will post to accounting. if you want that same exchange rate to be in Accounting document in Sales Order GOTO -> HEADER -> ACCOUNTING there one field is there 'Exch. please review: VBRP-KURSK Exchange Rate for the conversion Loc.

currency At price condition level. or somewhere in between. if credit control is performed across several company codes. An organizational unit that represents the area where customer credit is awarded and monitored. This organizational unit can either be a single or several company codes. During VF01 the system determines the Exchange rate for FI posting VBRK-KURRF from the currency tables according(OB08) to the billing date only if the field Exchange rate for FI posting is empty in the source sales document (VBKDKURRF). See the OSS note 36070. manually or copied from a reference invoice (by copy control routine). then it is copied in the subsequent billing document. decentralized. If the sales document has this field filled. Otherwise VBRK-KURRF is determined during invoice creation. This is the standard working of the system. It is always determined according to the Pricing date. The exchange rate should be based on your configuration in copy control (VTFA or VTFL) at the item category level. KOMV-KKURS Exchange Rate for the conversion Cond. One credit control area contains credit control information for each customer.to date of services rendered How To Do Configuration For Credit Management Credit and risk management takes place in the credit control area.rate determination accord. 97487. The choices you have are as follows: Pricing Exchange Rate Type (V_TVCPFLP-PFKUR) A Copy from sales order B Price exchange rate = Accounting rate C Exchange rate determination according to billing date D Exchange rate determination according to pricing date E Exchange rate determination according to current date F Exch. According to your corporate requirements. See the OSS notes 92613. then it is copied into VBRK-KURRF.Accounting). you can implement credit management that is centralized.currency <-> Loc. It is supposed that manual entry has higher priority. .

If. The credit control area found is stored in field VBAK-KKBER. You assign customers to specific credit control areas and specify the appropriate credit limits in the customer master record.4. Company code: Credit control area: 2. The settings of items 1 .4 are taken into account according to their priority. you can define one credit control area for all of your company codes. Transaction OBZK For the settings under items 2 . if your credit management is centralized. 1. on the other hand. field "All company codes" must be marked in Transaction OB45. Transaction OVFL Check which credit control area is assigned to the sales area. you can define credit control areas for each company code or each group of company codes. Transaction XD02 or VD02 Check which credit control area is assigned to the payer. or the credit control area must be entered under the relevant company code in . Transaction OB38 Check which credit control area is assigned to the company code. Sales area: Credit control area: 3. The implementation guide is under Enterprise Structure -> Definition or Assignment -> Financial Accounting and then Maintain credit control area. Tips by : Kapilaa Settings for determining the credit control area of a document. Transaction SE37 Is user exit EXIT_SAPV45K_001 being used? 5. You set up credit control areas and other data related to credit management in Customizing for Financial Accounting. your credit policy requires decentralized credit management.For example. Credit limits and credit exposure are managed at both credit control area and customer level. Payer: Credit control area: 4.

11. In particular. Settings for the credit checks 7. the individual credit checks for key fields o credit control area o risk category o credit group are set. Transaction OVAK Which settings do exist for the sales document type used? Sales document: Check credit: Credit group: 8. Company code: Credit control areas allowed: 6. Transaction OB01 Credit management/Change risk category Definition of the risk category for each credit control area. Take these key fields from the above settings and go to the detail screen. Credit account: Credit limit: Risk category: Currency: . check whether fields "Reaction" and "Status/block" are set correctly. To carry out follow-up actions in case of a credit block. 10. the credit check status must be set (field "Status/block").table T001CM of the credit control areas allowed. Transaction FD32 Credit master data for the payer of the relevant document. Transaction OVAD Which settings do exist for the delivery type used? Delivery type: Credit group for delivery: Credit group for goods issue: 9. This risk category can be assigned to a credit account by using Transaction FD32. Transaction OVA8 Here.

Pricing procedure: Line with subtotal = 'A': 15. subtotal "A" must be entered in a line for determining the credit value (mark the pricing procedure and doubleclick on "Control"). 13. This way the system is determined to use this subtotal for credit pricing. You can find the used pricing procedure of the order under "Item -> Condition -> Analysis". please tell us the alternative update group. The credit price is stored in field VBAP-CMPRE and used for update and credit check. Transaction OVA7 Update of the credit value is active for the corresponding item type if the check box is marked. the net value plus taxes is used. Transaction OB45 Which update group (field "Update") do you use in the relevant credit control area? The default setting is "12". All other settings will lead to errors.12. If you use another update group. Usually. This field corresponds to field "Active receivable" in Transaction VOV7. Credit control area: Update: 16. If you open an OSS message. Item type: Active receivable: 14. Pricing In the pricing procedure used for pricing. Transaction OMO1 Which kind of update did you choose for structure S066? In any case. Transaction V/08. check whether this is fine with you. "Synchronous update (1)" has to be chosen as the kind of update. MRP block for Credit limit attained Customers . Settings for updating the credit values Update of the credit values is required for the limit check (static or dynamic credit limit check).

IF W_CMGST = SPACE. MESSAGE I706(Z1). See in transaction "VOFM". For example. SELECT SINGLE * INTO W_ZSDCRD FROM ZSD_CREDITBLCK WHERE KKBER = VBAK-KKBER AND CTLPC = VBAK-CTLPC. using a routine similar to this will prevent the requirement from appearing in MD04 for orders blocked on credit. EXPORT VBUK-CMGST TO MEMORY ID 'CREDIT'. You should try and use one of the standard requirements. IMPORT VBUK-CMGST TO W_CMGST FROM MEMORY ID 'CREDIT'. . DATA: W_CMGST LIKE VBUK-CMGST.How to block the requirement (MD04) generated by the item category in a sales order when the customer has attained the credit limit? The MRP requirements still appear even though the schedule is zero. Under Requirements / Subsequent Functions / Reqs. ENDIF.Availablity. Code: DATA: W_ZSDCRD TYPE ZSD_CREDITBLCK. Irregardless. you may have to tweak if it doesn't work exactly as you'd like. *} REPLACE *{ INSERT DEVK966908 1 *} INSERT * Read the subsequent function information for the message PERFORM FOFUN_TEXT_READ USING GL_FOFUN CHANGING FOFUN_TEXT. you can write a routine 903 because you only wanted this reaction for certain business units. Try using routine 103. IF SY-SUBRC = 0 AND VBUK-CMGST CA 'B'.

ENDFORM. *{ INSERT DEVK966908 2 *} INSERT ENDIF.MESSAGE ID 'V1' TYPE 'E' NUMBER '849' WITH FOFUN_TEXT RAISING ERROR. This can be set up in customizing under risk management-> credit management. Does anyone know how I can automatically re-execute a dynamic credit check a few days prior to shipment for future dated sales orders. Any ideas would be appreciated. Regards Swami -----Reply Message----Subject: Re: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Leslie Paolucci We check credit at the time of the delivery (at delivery creation and before picking) and use the blocked sales doc process/list to release them. Rich Dragani -----Reply Message----Subject: Re: LOG: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Swami Subramanyan Program RVKRED08? Or manually execute function module SD_ORDER_CREDIT_RECHECK. . Do you have a SAP SD Question? Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking -----Original Message----Subject: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Richard Dragani Hi credit experts.

because of this the credit exposure is increasing continuously.-----End of Reply Message----- Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing -----Original Message----Subject: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing we are on 4. when i create the order .that value remains same in the feild of sales value. we are going for credit management but facing one problem. Regards. Your customer should be assigned the credit control area.6b. update group for corrosponding credit ctrl area is 12. can anyone tell the missing link? thanking in advance -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing Hi. 2. the bill value is appearing in 'receivables' but the amount in 'sales value' is not getting reduced. in fd32customer credit management change .the sales value feild in not getting updated after creating the billing. -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing . after creating the delivery . but when i am going for billing (delivery related). eg. In your Item Category Credit should be active.the order value get updated in the sales value in fd32. also the item is mark for credit update. You need to check couple of settings like: 1.

Check the credit update group in the transaction OB45. Have fun -----End of Message----- Difference Between Simple and Automatic Credit Check Types Explain in detail difference between simple and automatic credit check types.Code .Value : Sales Order Has been saved but not delivered Open Item : Sales Order has been saved .Value + Open Item Value is Rs.FD32 It Considers the Doc. but not received the payment from the customer. Billed & Transfered to FI. Further also refer to the OSS note 18613. Delivered.1.Value + Open Items.customer is assign to concorn CCA and item category is mark for credit active -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing Hi. difference between static and dynamic checks.000/Suppose Doc.000/Here credit limit exceeds then system reacts. Options : A) Warning Message B) Error Message (Sales Order won't be saved) C) Error Message with Delivery Block .1. It should be '000012'. Eg: Customer Credit Limit is Rs. The credit update group controls when the values of open sales orders. Doc.00. SIMPLE CREDIT CHECK : Tr. In automatic check. deliveries and billing documents are updated.10.

2.AUTOMATIC CREDIT CHECK : Give extra credit facilities to the particular customer.3& 4 values for the lost 3 months Then assign the Sales Doc & Del Documents.Value : Which is delivered but not billed 3) Open Billing Doc. DYNAMIC CREDIT CHECK : 1) Open Doc 2) Open Delivery 3) Open Billing 4) Open Items 5) Horizon Period = Eg.Value : Which is billed but not posted to FI 4) Open Item : Which is transfered to FI but not received from the customer. HIGH RISK (0001) : LOW CREDIT LOW RISK (0002) : MORE CREDIT MEDIUM RISK(0003) : Average Credit Static Credit Check it checks all these doc value & check with the credit limit 1) Open Doc. STATIC CREDIT LIMIT DETERMINATION :Checking Group + Risk Catageory + Credit Control Area.Type(OR) + credit Check(0) + Credit Group (01) .3Months Here the System will not consider the above 1. A) Credit Checking Groups : Types of Checking Groups. Sales Doc. B) Risk Catageory : Based on the risk catageories company decide how much credit has to give to the customer. 01) Sales 02) Deliveries 03) Goods Issue At all the above 3 levels orders can be blocked.Value / Sales Order Value : Which is save but not delievered 2) Open Delivery Doc.

The Update Group should be µ00012¶. create a subtotal line to store the value of the price plus any sales tax. after all pricing and tax determination. Make the following entries: Sub to: ³A´ Reqt: ³2´ AltCTy: ³4´ Automatic Credit Checking Transaction: OVA8 Tables: T691F Action: Select each combination of credit control areas. This entry is required so the sales order will calculate the value to authorize Assign Company Code to Credit Control Area Transaction: OB38 Tables: T001 Action: Assign a default credit control area for each company code Define Permitted Credit Control Area for a Company Code Transaction: Tables: T001CM Action: For each company code enter every credit control area that can be used Identify Credit Price Transaction: V/08 Tables: T683S Action: Towards the end of the pricing procedure.Type (LF) + Del Credit Group (02) + Goods Issue Credit Group (03) Set Up for Credit Card Payment Processing Given below is the set up for credit card payment processing: Set Up Credit Control Areas: Define Credit Control Area Transaction: OB45 Tables: T014 Action: Define a credit control area and its associated currency.Credit Limit Check for Delivery Type : Del. risk categories and document .

the only other entry should be ³3´ in the column labeled ³PymtGuaCat´ Define Payment Guarantee Procedure Transaction: Tables: T691M/T691O Action: Define a procedure and a description. You need to mark the field ³no Credit Check´ with the valid number for sales documents. Determine Payment Guarantee Procedure Transaction: OVFJ . Define Sales Document Payment Guarantee Flag Transaction: Tables: T691R Action: Define the flag that will be associated with sales document types that are relevant for payment cards Assign Sales Document Payment Guarantee Flag Transaction: Tables: TVAK Action: Assign the document flag type the sales documents types that are relevant for payment cards. Create Customer Payment Guarantee = ³Payment Card Payment Cards (All Customers can use Payment Cards)´. Forms of Payment Guarantee and make the following entries Sequential Number ³1´ Payment Guarantee Form ³02´ Routine Number ³0´ Routine Number can be used to validate payment card presence.types for which credit checking should be bypassed. Define Customer Payment Guarantee Flag Transaction: Tables: T691P Action: Define a flag to be stored in table. Other than the descriptor. Set Up Payment Guarantees Define Forms of Payment Guarantee Transaction: OVFD Tables: T691K Action: R/3 is delivered with form ³02´ defined for payment cards.

Below is just a sample of what I am aware are the different types of cards. Create the following two entries Cat Description One Card Additional Data CC Credit Cards No-check No-check PC Procurement Cards No-check Check Determine Card Categories Transaction: Tables: TVCTD Action: For each card category map the account number range to a card category. Multiple ranges are possible for each card category or a masking technique can be used. Define Card Categories Transaction: Tables: TVCTY Action: Define the card category to determine if a payment card is a credit card or a procurement card. *****SAP does not deliver a card check for Discover Card. and Discover Create the following entries for each payment card AMEX American Express ZCCARD_CHECK_AMEX Month DC Discover Card ZCCARD_CHECK_DC Month***** MC Mastercard ZCCARD_CHECK_MC Month VISA Visa ZCCARD_CHECK_VISA Month The Routines can be created based on the original routines delivered by SAP. American Express. We created our own routine. Mastercard. .Tables: T691U Action: Combine the Customer flag and the sales document flag to derive the payment guarantee procedure Payment Card Configuration Define Card Types Transaction: Tables: TVCIN Action: Create the different card types plus the routine that validates the card for length and prefix (etc«) Visa . Get the card number ranges from user community.

Visa Credit Expires in 7 days. 405501 405504 405550 405554 415928 415928 424604 424605 427533 427533 428800 428899 Mastercard Credit Expires in 30 days 500000 540499 540600 554999 557000 599999 Mastercard Procurement Expires in 30 days 540500 540599 555000 556999 American Express Credit Expires in 30 days 340000 349999 370000 379999 Discover Card Credit Expires in 30 days 601100 601199 Set Sales Documents to accept Payment Card Information Transaction: Tables: TVAK Action: Review the listing of Sales Document types and enter ³03´ in the column labeled ³PT´ for each type which can accept a payment card Configuration for Authorization Request Maintain Authorization Requirements Transaction: OV9A Tables: TFRM Action: Define and activate the abap requirement that determines when an . 400000 405500 405505 405549 405555 415927 415929 424603 424606 427532 427534 428799 428900 471699 471700 499999 Visa Procurement Expires in 7 days.

One for A/R reconciliation purposes and one for credit card clearing. AuthReq Routine 901 is set here. Valid You will get warning message if the payment card is expiring within 30 days of order entry date. Then follow the below guidelines for the remaining fields to be filled. Maintain Condition Types Transaction: OV85 . Assign Checking Group to Sales Document Transaction: Tables: TVAK Action: Assign the checking group to the sales order types relevant for payment cards Define Authorization Validity Periods Transaction: Tables: TVCIN Action: For each card type enter the authorization validity period in days. PreAu If checked R/3 will request an authorization for a .01 and the authorization will be flagged as such. A horizon This is the days in the future SAP will use to determine the value to authorize (Insight does not use auth horizon period). (Insight does not use pre-authorization check). VBAP. Note that the following tables are available to be used in the abap requirement (VBAK. VBUK. AMEX American Express 30 DC Discover card 30 MC Master card 30 VISA Visa 7 Configuration for clearing houses Create new General Ledger Accounts Transaction: FS01 Tables: Action: Two General Ledger accounts need to be created for each payment card type.authorization is sent. VBKD. Define Checking Group Transaction: Tables: CCPGA Action: Define a checking group and enter the description. and VBUP).

Tables: T685 Action: Define a condition type for account determination and assign it to access sequence ³A001´ Define account determination procedure Transaction: OV86 Tables: T683 / T683S Action: Define procedure name and select the procedure for control. Authorization and Settlement Control Transaction: Tables: TCCAA Action: Define the general ledger accounts for reconciliation and clearing and assign the function modules for authorization and settlement along with the proper RFC destinations for each. Enter Merchant ID¶s Transaction: Tables: TCCM Action: Create the merchant id¶s that the company uses to process payment cards Assign merchant id¶s Transaction: Tables: TCCAA Action: Enter the merchant id¶s with each clearinghouse account SAP SD Tips by : Radhakrishna Srinivas Dunning Process In Credit Management Explain about dunning process in credit management? Let me explain in simple terms: . Assign account determination procedure Transaction: Tables: Action: Determine which billing type we are using for payment card process. Enter the condition type defined in the previous step.

sending street rowdies for recovering the bad debts from users. you may proceed for auction of his property or as per the order for Law. he is doing good business and supplied material on Credit of 45 days. there will be no further supply to the customer. For each procedure. we will send at least further reminder (dunning notice) may be 9 times (9 reminders) (Dunning level) and what intervels of time (dunning frequency) c) Still if the customer doesnt resopond for the reminders. That is dunning. you have not managed Credit Checks as well. inorder to recover any bad debts. after getting veridict. you will file a law suit against the customer for recovering the Payments. you will not forget dunning forever. he had comfortably reached to the fullest credit (or even more) which you can afford for any customer.Amount limits . like: a) We will send a normal payment reminder. Now in SAP. sometime back. d) Finally. 3) One fine day you got realised that. 4) Your company's legal department has laid a policy that. b) In case customer doesnt respond. you will maintain the Dunning Procedure at customer master. Referring to this your SD Team / FI Team (user team) will effect Dunning PS: You might remembered the dunning procedure laid by Relaince Mobile.1) You have a Customer which you had felt. there is very bad debt with this customer and need to recover from him and till then. 2) Since this customer is good as you felt. the definition of Dunning procedure is a pre-defined procedure specifying how customers or vendors are dunned.Dunning frequency . So. Remember Reliance. the user defines .Number of dunning levels . Tips by : Kumar What do you mean by credit exposure? .Texts for the dunning notices In SAP.

advance) + Sales value 2. Surely you must run report RVKRED77 (Note 400311 . I mean does the system match the value of credit exposure with credit limit to find that it is exceeded or it does it differently? Credit exposure is in fact the main player.They are the transactions with a customer that are relevant for credit limits on a specified date. If you have bad data run the reorganization program through SE38.updated at Delivery 000018 .RVKRED77: Reorganization credit data. where we can get customer credit exposure which showing in FD32. Check Note 425523 .Collection of consulting notes: Credit update and related.updated at Billing To look at only Receivables for a customer look in FD32. How is credit exposure calculated (seen in FD32)? It¶s simple summation of Receivables + Special liabilities (like down payments. then also on creating Sales Order. 3. If Update=000012 in CCAr then on creating Sales Order. . 000012 . For reporting purpose. Is this correct? I think in case of 000015 Open sales order values should not be considered. But if update=000015. In credit management if the customer¶s credit limit is 10000 and credit exposure is 9900 then customer can only be able to buy now worth of 100 only. It¶s the credit exposure which should not crossed over the credit limit. the exposure increases by SO value. The credit exposure is updated based on the update algorithm assigned to the credit control area. 1. the exposure increases by SO value. What role exposure play in the credit management process.updated at Sales Order 000015 . new documentation and related will help you).

Some info on CIN Configuration (it may not appear as understandable below.JINFAC (Sales from manufacturing plants) . Excise Duty plays a vital role in manufacturing cenario¶s. CIN Configuration is a topic in itself.JINSTK (Stock transfers CIN: IMG > Logistics . . SAP SD CIN Configuration By Shesagiri What is CIN? CIN Means Country India Version In Indian Taxing procedure.Which taxes the registration covers (additional excise duty. and state: . it will be understood better) Country Version India comes with four pricing procedures as follows: .JINDEP (Sales from depots) . but if you check on screen. Excise code number. Excise related configuration is known as CIN configuration.31 for an overview of the credit exposure. .Go to t. excise registration number . and cess) Fields for any taxes that are not covered will be hidden in transactions involving excise duty. . You create one ID for each of your business's excise registrations.code F. and also you can use s_ALR_8701212218 to overview the credit exposure.Whether you are allowed partial CENVAT credits Maintain Registration ID NUMBER. you maintain excise registration IDs.Enter each of your excise registrations.JINEXP (Export sales) . specifying a four-character code for each Excise Registration Ids In this activity.General > Tax on Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Maintain Excise Registrations In this IMG activity. special excise duty.The maximum number of items to be printed on each excise invoice . you maintain the data relating to your excise registrations.For each excise registration in your business create a registration ID.

When you post a goods receipt. tobacco and sugar. Indicator for confirming. Excise range: Specifies the excise range in whose area the excise registration is located. Document Type for CENVAT Postings. Here ED is document type for cenvat posting. Excise Division: Specifies the excise division in whose area the excise registration is located. and adds the nondeductible duty to the material value.ECC Number: Specifies the organization's ECC number. Partial CENVAT Credit: Indicates that the excise registration ID is allowed to credit only a portion of its input excise duty to its CENVAT account Dependencies . Dependencies . you maintain the data relating to your company codes. This information is used to split the transfer postings' items into multiple subcontracting challans. Every entity with an excise registration number is required to keep its own excise books. the system splits the input excise duty on the material into its deductible and nondeductible amounts. which document type the system uses when making CENVAT postings in Financial Accounting (FI). These are livable under the additional duties of excise act. Example . Similarly for SED CESS Number of Items in Excise Invoice Shows the maximum number of line items that the authorities allow per excise invoice. AED usage Additional Excise duty Percentage.This information is used when you create an excise invoice in Sales and Distribution (SD) for factory sales and for other movements. In this IMG activity. Excise Collectorate: The code of the excise collectorate in whose area the excise registration is located. . It posts the deductible duty to the appropriate CENVAT account.Additional Excise duty is livable in case of textile products. These duties are in addition to basic excise duty and special excise duty. This information is also shown when you post the vendor's excise invoice. Excise register set description: Description of the excise registers set. It controls. Excise Registration Number: A number assigned to each premises or location that has registered as a manufacturer with the excise authorities. Maintain Company Code Settings.

To indicate the method opted by the company for selecting the excise invoice. Any change by the Excise authorities regarding start month should be taken care of by an entry in this field and initialization. Document type for TDS FI posting: Financial accounting document type for TDS posting. Example .If the value of this field is 20 and today is 28-03-97. If the duty amount is less than one rupee then no rounding is done Rounding off of Excise duty for outgoing excise invoice .Excise year start month.Indicates debit accounts can be overwritten.Indicator for providing debit account overwriting Debit Account Overwrite Indicator. The rounding is done at the item level for each item where the amount is greater than 1 Rupee. Indicator for item level excise duty round off . Document type for FI posting on Utilisation Financial accounting document type for TDS posting. . X . It can be either earliest or latest invoices that were received. Use In excise journal voucher transaction. It provides the flexibility to the user to enter the debit account of his choice depending on the nature of transaction. Excise invoice selection procedure :Excise invoice selection type.You can round off the Excise amount to be paid during an outgoing Excise invoice by marking this indicator as 'X'. This will not round off the CENVAT credit to be taken. Days to be considered for excise invoice selection Number of days from document date for excise invoice selection. The month 04 is entered here indicating April of the calendar year as the start month for excise invoices. The excise invoice selection will show the related invoices only for the period 08-03-97 to 28-03-97. This start month represents the month for the start of the excise invoice number range. The calendar month marking the beginning of the excise year. Automatic balance Indicator . Number of excise invoices to be selected Indicates the number of excise invoices that needs to be selected in the excise invoice selection.This indicator is to be used for deciding whether Item level excise duty amount rounding off is required during procurement cycle. If marked 'X' then the excise duty amount will be rounded off to the nearest rupee at the Purchase order level.

you maintain excise information relating to your plants. multiple credit Maintain Excise Groups .When you are creating an Excise invoice for export sales then the exchange rate for duty calculation will be picked up using this Exchange rate type. . CVD Clearing Account .Depots are required to prepare register RG 23D. and follow different procedures for goods receipt and invoice generation.Number of goods receipt per excise invoice. you define your excise groups. and the bank buying and selling rates for valuation of foreign currency amounts. for use in the following year. Plant Settings .In this activity. You can use the average rate for the currency translation. Single credit . Exchange rate type to be used for Export excise duty converts .You can use the exchange rate type to define a buying rate. The rest is posted the CENVAT on hold account. .You can assign the same ID to more than one plant. Depot . . . selling rate.You enter the exchange rate type to store different exchange rates.Instructs the system. Example .Multiple GR for one excise invoice. . For each excise group.Multiple GR for one excise invoice. you can also control how various excise invoice transactions will work.Specify whether it is a manufacturing site or a depot. or average rate for translating foreign currency amounts. .Immediate Credit on Capital Goods .Indicates that the plant in question is a depot.In this IMG activity. if required.Assign it an excise registration ID.Key representing a type of exchange rate in the system. . Exchange rate type . For each plant: . to immediately post half of the input excise duty to the appropriate CENVAT accounts.In this IMG activity. when you verify a goods receipt for capital goods.Specifies which G/L account the system credits when you take a CENVAT credit on countervailing duty in the Incoming Excise Invoices transaction. Maintain Plant Settings . you maintain excise information relating to your plants.

Excise Group Governs which set of excise registers a business transaction will be included in. If the indicator 'Folio no create' is marked system will generate Folio numbers for RG23D during receipt of excise invoice into depot. If you receive only one consignment for an Excise challan then you can leave GR's per EI as blank. in transactions involving excise duty. then you need to maintain only one excise group. Then. 10. 4.Excise Groups . excise authorities require every business to maintain only one set of excise registers and one set of accounts. 3. An excise group allows you to maintain a separate set of excise registers and excise accounts. Create one excise group for each set of registers that you need to keep. Following is the relation between excise group. Alternatively if you want to availa the credit only after all the goods receipts have been made mark it as ' Multiple GR for one excise invoice.Under normal circumstances. multiple books can be maintained. RG 23C and PLA serial numbers are created for an excise group. 'Automatic posting' when ticked will post the Excise invoice other movements automatically along with creation in single step. plant and registration. The RG 23A. 7. 9. This will post the selected records into RG23D automatically. you define excise groups. Maintain whether this Excise group is for a depot or not. 6. when you post a vendor's . 1. If your company has only one set of excise registers. 8. multiple credit'. If you want to automatically create Excise invoice during Sales cycle at the time of billing the tick the indicator 'Create EI' 5. But through exemption from the authorities. If you receive multiple GR's for a given Excise challan and would like to avail multiple credit mark the GRs per EI as 'Multiple GR's for one excise invoice. 2. . 11.In define excise groups in Customizing. 'Create Part1 for Block Stock' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material into Blocked stock . If the indicator 'Default GR qty' is marked system will default the Excise challan quantity on to the Goods receipt if the Excise invoice number is given in the pop-up. You cannot cancel the selection later. Recommendation . single credit'. During depot sales if you do not want to do RG23D selection and posting separately and would like to complete RG23D selection in one step mark the indicator 'RG23D Auto post'. 'Create Part1 for consumption stock' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material into consumption stock. 'Create Part1 for STO' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material through inter plant transfers.In this activity. Assign the excise groups to plants. for example.

. Single Credit Create Excise Invoice Automatically . excise group.Depots are required to prepare register RG 23D. At the end of the period. If this is not selected then you need to separately do RG23D selection followed by PGI and then RG23D verification and posting. .Multiple GR for one excise invoice .RG23D Automatic Option if selected will create Depot excise invoice by posting the selection of excise invoices in single step.Multiple GR for one excise invoice .Consignment stock Maintain Series Group . .Series Group Determination. Series groups allow you to maintain multiple number ranges for the outgoing excise documents. Folio number for depo Posting .excise invoice. If you need automatic posting of RG23D selection then the Post Goods Issue should have been completed before running RG23D selection. You need not separately Post the excise invoice Also we can set indicator for creation of part 1 for: .If this indicator is ticked then while doing Goods Receipt using 'MB01' system will default the excise invoice quantity on to the Goods receipt document. you define the different excise series groups within your company. and series groups in Customizing for Sales and Distribution (SD). you specify which excise group you are using.Instructs the system to automatically create a Sales and Distribution (SD) excise invoice immediately you create a commercial invoice or a pro forma invoice.If this indicator is marked then while creating Excise invoice for other movements system automatically does the Verify and Post. The excise invoice is created in the background.GR Per Excise Invoice . you must also define the default plant. you create different sets for each excise group. by choosing Excise Group .Blocked stock .In this IMG activity. and follow different procedures for goods receipt and invoice generation.Stock transport order . Default excise qty in GR . Based on excise regulations and .If you want to make use of this function. RG23D Sales Creation and posting option . when you come to prepare your excise registers. This information tells the system which G/L accounts to post the excise to. Indicates that the plant in question is a depot. Multiple credit .

This tax procedure also supports condition-based excise determination. . If the flag is checked then system will create an Excise invoice in the given Series group but there will not be any account postings or Part2 postings. group 001 for excise invoices. the system immediately pays the amount from CENVAT and creates the Part II entry.General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Determination of Excise Duty > Select Tax Calculation Procedure In this IMG activity. . Maintain Excise Duty Indicators .In this IMG activity. use a copy of the tax procedure TAXINJ. use a copy of the tax procedure TAXINN. .No account postings for CENVAT in sales cycle . the account determination within CIN IMG should point to the ED interim account. so that you can work with both concurrently.Define excise series groups based on type of outgoing document . But each of these series has to be declared to the excise authorities. .If the CENVAT has to be paid immediately and you need not wait for the Fort nightly payment then mark the 'Immediate Utilization' Iindicator.No utilization Flag If you do not need any CENVAT utilization for an excise invoice but would like to just generate an excise invoice then you need to mark this indicator. . Example . If you have both fortnightly and immediate utilization for the same excise group. Immediate Utilization of CENVAT . and group 002 for 57 F4 documents.If you use condition-based excise determination. Account determination for immediate payment will be done exactly the same as being done for fortnightly utilization program.If no financial postings are required for an Excise invoice in this seris group then you tick the 'No utilization' indicator.You could define two series groups. you maintain the excise duty indicators.Assign series group to excise registration ID . IMG > Logistics . . Such invoices will not be listed for fortnightly utilization. you specify which tax procedure you want to use for determining excise duties and sales taxes on input materials in India.exemptions from the authorities you can maintain multiple number series for outgoing documents.If you use formula-based excise determination.Specifies that when you create an excise invoice.

If you use formula-based excise determination. . fill out all of the fields as follows: .Enter the tax procedure and the pricing conditions that are relevant for excise tax processing. . you define which tax procedure and pricing condition types are used in calculating excise taxes using formula-based excise determination. a purchase order. and cess. field and leave all the others blank. When you come to enter a purchasing document. such as which vendor you purchase a material from. If you use condition-based excise determination. otherwise you will not be able to display old documents. for example. Maintain Excise Defaults . Both tax procedures contain condition types that cover all of the excise duties and sales taxes applicable. the R/3 System automatically calculates the applicable excise duties using the condition technique.Specify the countervailing duty condition type used for import purchase orders. . special excise duty.Specify the conditions in the sales order that are used for excise rates.In this IMG activity.We strongly recommend that new customers use condition-based excise determination. you create condition records for every sort of excise duty. Note that once you have started using a tax procedure. fill out the CVD cond. IMG > Logistics .General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Determination of Excise Duty > Condition-Based Excise Determination When you enter a purchasing document. the system applies the excise duty at the rates you have entered in the condition records. . TAXINN is only supports condition-based excise determination. Features : The standard system comes with two tax calculation procedures. whereas TAXINJ supports condition-based excise determination and formula-based excise determination. See also : SAP Library -> Logistics -> Country Versions -> Asia-Pacific -> India -> Materials Management (MM) -> Condition-Based Excise Determination and -> Formula-Based Excise Determination. Since the exact rates of excise duty can vary on a large number of factors. or which chapter ID the vendor stocks the material under. you cannot switch to another one.Specify the purchasing and sales conditions types used for basic excise duty. additional excise duty.

When the ordered materials arrive. The system then calculates the excise duties using the condition records you have created. These activities include one activity where you define a tax code for condition-based excise determination. enter FV11 and choose .Create condition records for all excise duties that apply. . Save the condition record. plant. by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements Account -> Excise Duties Using Condition Technique and «-> Settings Determination.Plant master data . you must have maintained all the data on the Excise Rate Maintenance screen. The system posts the excise duty to the appropriate accounts for deductible input taxes when you enter the excise invoice. In the command field. and chapter ID. for example. The Key Combination dialog box appears. Control Code means "chapter ID. 3. enter the dummy tax code that you have defined.When you enter a purchase order or other purchasing document. 6. In order for the system to be able to determine which rate of excise duty to apply. On the dialog box. enter the tax code for condition-based excise determination in each line item. you post the goods receipt and the excise invoice.Customizing : Make the settings in Customizing Basic -> India -> for Logistics ± General. Formula-Based Excise Determination . Day-to-Day Activities . Creating Condition Records for Excise Duty 1. Enter data as required. which you can Master Data®access from the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing Indirect Taxes Excise Rate Maintenance. 4. and enter the tax code for condition-based excise determination in each. 2. Choose . Select the combination of objects that you want to create the condition record for." So. select Country/Plant/Control Code. to create a condition record for a tax that applies to a combination of country. You maintain the following types of data: .When you execute a business transaction involving materials that are subject to excise duty. the system automatically calculates the duty for you. 5. Enter the condition type that you want to create a condition record for and choose . Master Data .In the Tax Code field.

3. Finally. for each permutation of plant indicator and customer indicator. See also the information about manufacturers that are only entitled to deduct a certain portion of the duty (see Partial CENVAT Credit).Customer master data Similarly. Assume you are posting a sale of ball bearings to a customer. you then create a final excise duty indicator. The system looks up the table under Excise Indicator for Plant and Customer to see what the final excise duty indicator is for customer status 3 and plant status 2: It is 7. your plant has status 2. If your business only qualifies for partial CENVAT credit. The system determines the chapter ID of the ball bearing for the plant. Again. Let¶s assume the chapter ID at plant for the ball bearings is 1000. 5. You must also specify the vendor type ± for example. 2. such as all those that are in an exempt zone. you assign the same excise duty indicator to each of your customers that share the same legal excise status. The system automatically determines the rate of excise duty as follows: 1. Looks up the plant master data to see what status you have assigned the plant. a depot. For each permutation of plant indicator and vendor indicator.Excise tax rate For every chapter ID and final excise duty indicator. you define an excise duty indicator. you must customize your system accordingly. . . or a first-stage dealer. . . whether the vendor is a manufacturer. Looks up the customer master data to see what status you have assigned the customer.Vendor master data For each of your vendors with the same excise status from a legal perspective. You must also stipulate if the vendor qualifies as a small-scale industry. you then create a final excise duty indicator. You can use the same indicator for all the plants with the same excise status from a legal point of view.01. .You assign each of your plants an excise duty indicator. Let us consider an example to illustrate how the system determines which rate of excise duty to apply to a material. 4. Similarly.Material master data Each material is assigned a chapter ID.01 under status 7. you maintain the rate of excise duty. Let's assume you've assigned the customer status 3. the system looks up the table under Excise Tax Rate to see what rate of duty applies to chapter ID 1000.

. .Assign an account to each of the following posting keys. use the condition types contained in the pricing procedures. The accounts for VS1.In this IMG activity.You have set up G/L accounts for each of the processing keys listed below.VS1 (basic excise duty) . you specify which G/L accounts you will use to record which taxes. Do not make any other settings for it. the system only uses the condition types that you enter here. use the condition types contained in the tax procedure.In this IMG activity. you define a tax code for the purposes of calculating excise duty when you enter purchasing documents. IMG > Logistics . Only carry out this activity if you use condition-based excise determination. .VS2 (additional excise duty) .Assign Tax Code to Company Codes In this IMG activity. assign the tax code for purchasing documents to the company codes where it will be used. Only carry out this activity if you use condition-based excise determination. and set the tax code type to V (input tax).Create a new tax code. VS2. when you create a purchasing document.MW3 (local sales tax) .MWS (central sales tax) . Note that this only applies to condition types that you use with the new excise determination method. For example. Use these settings as a basis for your own.For taxes on sales.General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Account Determination Define G/L Accounts for Taxes . the system determines the various excise duties in the excise invoice using the information that you have entered here. and VS3 are used as clearing accounts during excise invoice verification. The system uses this information when you create a document from another one.Define Tax Code for Purchasing Documents . Classify Condition Types . . .VS5 (sales tax setoff) . . you specify which condition types you use for which sort of tax.VS3 (special excise duty) . The standard system comes with sample settings for the tax calculation procedures and pricing procedures. when you enter an incoming excise invoice from a purchase order. In addition. or when you create an outgoing excise invoice from a sales order. Requirements .For taxes on purchases.In this IMG activity.

In this IMG activity. Enter all the accounts that are affected by each transaction type.Excise group .Chart of accounts Furthermore. This will be set off when you remit the duty. The fortnightly CENVAT payment utility picks up the credit side accounts from the transaction types of GRPO. you specify which excise accounts (for excise duty and CENVAT) are to be posted to for the various transaction types.In this IMG activity. . For most businesses. you can also use sub transaction types. so maintain the credit account for transaction type DLFC as an excise duty interim account. Config setting needed to be done in order to get the Excise Details Screen in Material Master.Maintained the transaction accounts Activities .Defined the G/L accounts . Requirements You have already: . you assign the excise and CENVAT accounts to G/L accounts. the system determines which G/L accounts to post to by looking at the: .Excise TT DC ind Account name . When you come to execute the various transactions. enter the accounts for each sub transaction type as well. Transaction type UTLZ is used for determining accounts only while posting excise JVs and also if the payment of excise duty has to be done fortnightly. If you use sub transaction types..ESE (service tax expense) Specify Excise Accounts per Excise Transaction . Example: .Defined the excise groups . and TR6C for determining the CENVAT and PLA accounts.ESA (service tax) . if you want separate account determination settings within an excise group. There is no separate transaction type for fortnightly payment. EWPO.GRPO CR CENVAT clearing account .For each excise group. assign the excise and CENVAT accounts to G/L accounts. Note : you need not remit the CENVAT to the excise department immediately.GRPO DR CENVAT on hld account Specify G/L Accounts per Excise Transaction .Company code . one set of accounts will suffice for all transactions.GRPO CR RG 23 BED account .

Material Master à Logistics General 1. no. 3. If the setting is correct in the outbound delivery screen SAP will automatically switch post goods issue button into post goods receipt. The steps are as follows : 1. Go to the last sub screen i. Following document helps you to do this configuration. 3. . select data screen no. You will then decide if the return quantity are indeed bad stock or not. In the standard system the movement type used is 651. After post goods issues receipt is done using outbound delivery. ie. 5.SAPLMGD1. 2.6 you delete SAPLMGD1 ± 0001 and instead add SAPLJ1I_MATERIAL_MASTER and in the screen no. Once the data screens are exhibited. 4. The setting is in sales order item category and delivery type. Create a return request. 6. Usually it would be 21. 21-15-6 . 7. 2205. the quantity is placed in blocked stock without value updating. 15. 6. Select the same and click on Data Screen in the left frame.Even though this functionality is available in enterprise version. Save the setting. a small configuration step has to be made in Screen Sequences for Material Master.Sales Order type RE). (Using Sales Order in SD) 2.0001 and select the same.e. 4. Select the same and click on Sub screens in the left frame. . Return material From customer You need to receipt the rejected goods through SD Module (VA01 . Excise related sub screen appears. Now in the last sub screen i.e. which is ³Foreign Trade: Import Data´. Click on tab view sub screen and ensure that the sub screen is blank. Create outbound delivery according to return request. SSq. 21and Scrn 15. Create a Material Master and check whether in Screen Foreign Trade ± Import. Select your screen sequence. Go to IMG Define Structure of Data Screen for each Configuring the Material master Screen Sequence. 5.

The return triggers the following functions: . you: Post the goods to your warehouse for checking And then. VL09 creates the movement type 602 Q. blocked stock).Approve the complaint and create a credit memo .7. once you have checked the goods and approved the complaint.Delivery (returns delivery) .{T-Code: XK01} In config go to Basis Components --> basis services --> Address Management --> Maintain title texts Do you have a SAP SD Question? What processes are involved with Customer Returns? How do we create a replacement order.Approve the complaint. and implement a free of charge subsequent delivery based on the return . Credit COGS) 8. But rather than VL09. Transfer Posting from block stock to unrestricted stock (mvt type 453).Billing (for creating a credit memo) When you create a return based on a complaint. and post the goods to stock (for example. implement one of the following activities: . Create a credit memo. and what should we do if a replacement is not issued? A return is a sales document used in complaints processing for when a customer sends goods back. we use project stock (movement type 601 Q for PGI). You enter a return in the system if the customer returns damaged goods. or goods that had been delivered for sale on approval. this will have accounting effect (Debit Inventory. The return causes the system to: Register the receipt of goods using a returns delivery. the generally accepted method in . In my company. Goods Issue to scrap account how to create new titles which can be used in creating the "address" view on the Vendor master.Reject the complaint PGI (Post Goods Issue) may be cancelled by Transaction code VL09. A return is another type of sales document like a standard order. The accounting document is just the reverse of the original PGI document.

You can make reference Mandatory for this order type." The accounting document takes the cost "from" the project and moves it back "to" the storage location. Create a credit memo. "back to the to the storage location. which are then assigned to the item categories. the billing type is picked up as RE (Return Credit Memo) automatically. However. or goods that had been delivered for sale on approval.my company for the reverse items is to use the movement type 653. If you do not give replacement. delivery. The delivery type for this replacement order type will be LF and billing type F2. Please do not forget to create a Billing document (Formally Return Credit Memo) with reference to return delivery. in this process. blocked stock). If you have a delivery related invoice. When you are creating a replacement.Delivery (returns delivery) . you can define the relevant item categories from RE to OR. The return causes the system to: Register the receipt of goods using a returns delivery. "no invoice" takes place. and billing. It is very important in order to close the cycle.Billing (for creating a credit memo) . it should be cancelled beforehand. If you do not create a return credit memo. The return triggers the following functions: . and post the goods to stock (for example. once you have checked the goods and approved the complaint. the Customer Account needs to be credited. The movement types are entered in the schedule lines in customizing. you can create a replacement order. In the copy control. You enter a return in the system if the customer returns damaged goods. What processes are involved with Customer Returns? How do we create a replacement order. and what should we do if a replacement is not issued? A return is a sales document used in complaints processing for when a customer sends goods back. When you create a return order type RE. you can define an order type by copying from order type OR. A return is another type of sales document like a standard order. To create the replacement order. your delivery will keep appearing in the "Billing Due" list and with status "Being processed".

In the copy control. To create the replacement order. . It is very important in order to close the cycle. the Customer Account needs to be credited. Usage of price group in customer master Have a business requirement like this: The price group field is used for different discount rates for the customers. The accounting document is just the reverse of the original PGI document. The delivery type for this replacement order type will be LF and billing type F2. implement one of the following activities: . you can define an order type by copying from order type OR. in this process. we use project stock (movement type 601 Q for PGI). Please do not forget to create a Billing document (Formally Return Credit Memo) with reference to return delivery. The movement types are entered in the schedule lines in customizing. I am not sure of the usage of price groups in customer master to use for the discount for the customers.Approve the complaint and create a credit memo . you: Post the goods to your warehouse for checking And then. which are then assigned to the item categories.Approve the complaint. and billing. VL09 creates the movement type 602 Q. If you have a delivery related invoice. But rather than VL09. In my company. you can define the relevant item categories from RE to OR.When you create a return based on a complaint. the generally accepted method in my company for the reverse items is to use the movement type 653. There are 2 types of customers wholesale and retail. delivery. When you are creating a replacement. you can create a replacement order. it should be cancelled beforehand. If you do not create a return credit memo. "no invoice" takes place. When you create a return order type RE. your delivery will keep appearing in the "Billing Due" list and with status "Being processed".Reject the complaint PGI (Post Goods Issue) may be cancelled by Transaction code VL09." The accounting document takes the cost "from" the project and moves it back "to" the storage location. However. and implement a free of charge subsequent delivery based on the return . If you do not give replacement. the billing type is picked up as RE (Return Credit Memo) automatically. You can make reference Mandatory for this order type. "back to the to the storage location.

. Price group can be added as filed in pricing condition table and you can maintain condition records for them: In VK11 the table with price group 1 is maintained discount of 5 % In VK11 the table with price group 2 is maintained discount of 6 % In VK11 the table with price group 3 is maintained discount of 7 % So in sales order the customers A to D will get 5 % discount and customers E to G will get 6 % discount and customers H to J will get 7 % discount. Now when you create the sales order with Customer A then he will be getting extra discount But if you create the sales order with Customer B then he will be getting normal discount Price group is a field where you can group certain customers under one umbrella. . Now for wholesale you give extra discount and for retail you give less discount.You are assigning customers A to D in price group 1. .You are assigning customers E to G in price group 2. Suppose if you have 3 price groups say price group1 price group2 and price group3. Customer A belongs to Wholesale Pricing grp and Customer B belongs to Retail Pricing grp.You are assigning customers H to J in price group 3 in their respective CMRs. How can I create a customer price group? . Say there are 10 customers A to J. Maintain a condition record With the help of the Customer / Pricing grp key combination.Answer: Generally the usage of customer group is to group the customers into One group so that whenever you want to give some additional discount to that customer group then you can give Example : Say you have 2 customers and 2 customers have 2 pricing groups.

Please go through this IMG path then define the Customer pricing group. at the header level. 4) Assign sales areas: symple you indicate wich sales areas are allowed in your hierarchy. in the order. This might be useful when for example you create a condition discount for a customer that is part of such a hierarchy structure. will thus receive the same discount. Customer hierarchy setup. (Here you can customize common sales areas. It is possible to maintain so called customer hierarchies. 2) Set partner determination: if you want to user the hierarchy in price determination. The standard is type A. just for not having to build de hierarchy in all the different sales areas). Transaction code --> OVSL Customizing Customer Hierarchy in SD How to configure and maintain the SD Customer Hierarchy? All the customizing is in SD/Master Data/Bussiness Partner/Customers/Customers hierarchy 1) Define hierarchy type: just put and ID and a name to the new hierarchy. you have to have a Partner Procedure with a partner function for each level. SPRO --> IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Basic Functions ------> Pricing --> Maintain Price relevant master data fields ---> Define Pricing group for Customers. 3) Assign acount groups: you indicate which accounts groups are allowed for being part or your hierarchy. you obtain the bussiness partner for each partner function. in each partner function you must indicate the source partner function. With this informacition. 5) Assigning hierarchy type for pricing: you indicate which classes of documentos uses hierarchy in pricing determination. All subnodes in the hierarchy below that customer. In the partner procedure. in the orders. then. firstly decide the hierarchy type to be used. .

You want to assign a ship-to to a payer. The product hierarchy is used for evaluation and pricing purposes. The first four characters 0001 could indicate that the product is a car.business partners . All these settings can be found in the IMG. Thus.master data . SAP SD Tips by : Sam Basic SD Questions On Product Hierarchies What is the significance of product hierarchy? Alphanumeric character string for grouping materials by combining various characteristics. If you use a customer hierarchy you can maintain the discount for the partner in the top of the hierarchy and in this way it will be valid for all customers in the hierarchy.You can also assign a partner function to the customer so that the higher level customer in the hierarchy is copied into a sales order as a partner function . . You must also make an entry for permitted sales area assignments. a product hierarchy could be 00010002000300040005. So if you want to a hierarchy for customers in the same sales area then enter the sales area and enter the same one as the higher level sales area. The third set of characters could indicate the color of the car.customers . Unilever does have different locations / businesses and you have to maintain the discount for all customers. To take an example. And enter the combinations that will be allowed for creating the hierarchy. The next four characters could indicate 0002 the plant in which the car has been manufactured. A product hierarchy is an alphanumeric character string which consists of 18 characters at the most. The next set may determine its engine capacity and so on.customer hierarchy You use for example customer hierarchy when you have an company like Unilever and you agree both on a discount. the product hierarchy helps in defining the product composition. Product hierarchy thus define the product and its composition. Under SD .but you don't need that right? Next assign your customer account group to the hierarchy type. So enter the ship to account group and enter the payer account group as the higher level.

Product hierarchy is defined in tcode v/76 according to levels. This hierarchy can be used in pricing with each level being used as field in the condition technique. You have to give the product hierarchy in Material master Sales. It is used for sales reporting functionality based on the product hierarchy. Then it is added as a user defined characteristic in tcode KES1. Explain the use of product hierarchy and the step by step procedure to define and use it? Product Hierarchy is used for Profitability analysis. Different material codes can have same product hierarchy (assigned to material master in basic data view). The hierarchy is broken down into specific levels. When a sales cycle happen then after billing document a PA (profitability analysis) document is created in which product hierarchy is populated and used in CO-PA reporting. each level containing its own characteristics.Logistics General --> Material Master --> Settings for Key Fields --> Data Relevant to Sales and Distribution --> Define Product Hierarchies --> Maintain Product Hierarchy Product hierarchies can be created using code OVSV. It is used for profitability analysis reporting. one can determine a classification of the material.Sales Org -2 view. You can have maximum of three level in SAP for a product. Thus by assigning the hierarchy number to the material. . The hierarchy number can have a maximum of 18 digits with a maximum number of nine levels. You can define the product hierarchy in IMG settings from the following path Customizing is to be made in: IMG -. A product hierarchy is recorded by the sequence of digits within a hierarchy number. A product hierarchy is assigned to the material master record.

alto. zen. The maximum number of digits is 18 and the maximum number of levels is 9. The first and second levels have 5 digits and the third level has 8. A product hierarchy is recorded by the sequence of digits within a hierarchy number. of wood products also. Swift. This hierarchy number may have a maximum of 18 digits with a maximum of 9 levels.g. each level containing its own characteristics. B>> 01 >>01 Then from above example B0101 is the hierarchy for SX4. like variants and all the things. The individual levels can contain the following number of digits: Level number of allowed digits: 15 25 38 . The custom Product hierarchies can be maintained in V/76. CAR>>MARUTI>>SX4. In this way you can take e. It shows the next level of the product. In the standard system. How To Configure Product Hierarchy Product Hierarchy: Product hierarchies are the domain of materials management. the product hierarchy consists of up to 3 levels. Product Hierarchy Number of chars at Various level: In the standard system. A product hierarchy is assigned to the material master record.It¶s like if you are having category CAR. The product hierarchy can be structured via DDIC structure PRODHS. How many levels that product are having. This hierarchy is broken down into specific levels. So in that hierarchy many cars come. You can define hierarchy nodes at the individual levels of the product hierarchy. a product hierarchy can be created with up to three levels. In that many cars come into picture.

g. where n is the position of the field in the structure PRODHS. . where it is possible to extend the maximum number of levels to 9..This can be changed as of Release 3. category CHAR.0. you want to change the number of levels. ZPRODH4 with length 3. 2.. You want to change the structure of the product hierarchy from 5/5/8 digits to 5/5/5/3.. 3. Assign these domains to the standard data elements PRODH1. e. If you want to change the standard setting of PRODHS. Change structure PRODHS: Structure PRODHS in the standard system: Structure Fields Data element Category Length PRODHS -> PRODH1 PRODH1 CHAR 5 PRODH2 PRODH2 CHAR 5 PRODH3 PRODH3 CHAR 8 . Change the structure PRODHS by creating or deleting fields with reference to the data elements. PRODH2. PRODH9. Create an appropriate domain in the Data Dictionary (type CHAR with the required length). Proceed as follows: Create the following domains: ZPRODH3 with length 5. Choose ZZPRODHN as field name. Please note that you should use these standard data elements. category CHAR. proceed as follows: 1.

Can you kindly help by giving the simple steps for implementation. Please see if the following helps: Configuration Overview. The user has the opportunity to set an indicator to identify their choice of two different methods (discrete and cumulative allocation) to evaluate the quantities to be considered for product allocation. The object allows the user to further break down a procedure into smaller parts for future validation of components comprising a specific material .General-> Material Master-> Settings for Key Fields-> Data Relevant to Sales and Distribution-> Define Product Hierarchies We are required to implement product allocation functionality in SAP R/3 (Enterprise Version). it is in the procedure that the method of allocation is defined.Changes according to example: Structure Fields Data element Category Length PRODHS -> PRODH1 PRODH1 CHAR 5 PRODH2 PRODH2 CHAR 5 PRODH3 PRODH3 CHAR 5 ZZPRODH4 PRODH4 CHAR 3 Please take help of ABAPER in extending the levels of Product hierarchy.Allocation Object (OV2Z) The allocation object is the root level of the allocation process where actual data is entered and planned in LIS. Allocation Specific Usage 1.0.Allocation Procedure (OV1Z) The product allocation procedure is the parent of the entire allocation process. All materials that are to be included in the allocation scheme are required to have an allocation procedure assigned to it in the material master. We tried to do the elaborate steps as per the implementation guide but are not successful. 2. In addition. Configure for Product hierarchy at : SPRO-> IMG-> Logistics . as of release 4.

the levels for the collective allocation search procedure are also identified. the user can assign a step level to the procedure and information structure to sequence the order in which allocation quantities are checked. 5.Allocation Hierarchy Mapping (OV3Z) Primarily.Activate Allocation for Schedule Line Category (OVZ8) In order to turn on allocation in the standard order processing functionality. 7. This functionality allows the user the opportunity to check product allocation against several product allocation scenarios. The consumption window indicates the number of past and future periods to be used in the allocation check. This transaction simply reads the hierarchy established in the planning table and then generates a collective mask character for each level of the hierarchy . 9. allocation control records are created primarily to map allocation procedure steps to their corresponding objects so that the allocation data records can be located for validation. In this step.3. Secondly.Activate Allocation for Requirement Class (OVZ0) In order to turn on allocation in the standard order processing functionality. before the required quantity is confirmed 4. the requirements class must have a flag indicating that allocation is relevant.Define Consumption Periods (OV5Z) The allocation consumption periods functionality is only valid if the allocation method flag has been set (OV1Z). this functionality is not available. the schedule line must have a flag indicating that allocation is relevant 8. validity periods must be established to indicate when the allocation control records are active. a character is assigned to the information structure to permit collective planning. Finally.Control Product Allocation (OV4Z) In order for the allocation process to function properly.Generate Masking Character (OV7Z) Upon completion of the level determination for the planning hierarchy. the user has the option of establishing a conversion factor per allocation control record to accommodate BOM listings of constrained materials 6. the user must initially determine the level at which the allocation is to take place and the aggregation factor of the allocation quantities. Finally. If you have de-selected the method field. the collective allocation masking character must be generated to allow aggregation indicators to be established. this transaction permits the assignment of an allocation procedure to an LIS information structure.Create Planning Hierarchy (MC61) In order to adequately establish allocation quantities. Secondly.

This report simply reads through the data dictionary and selects all the active information structures that contain the field product allocation object (KONOB) as the first field. Finally. In order entry. In order to complete the hierarchical set up. Sending a billing document by e-mail First. Sales Sales Order by Organisation. Whether it can send pdf or other file format will depends on the Mail Server you are using. then. This data can then be utilized in the mapping transaction (OV3Z) to link the allocation procedure step to an information structure (previous step). The basis people must also maintain the conversion parameters so that SAP knows how to convert the billing documents to be send as a pdf file or other desired format specified by your company. the collective allocation (mask character) hierarchy must now be maintained with the appropriate aggregation factors 11. when a material is entered with a valid allocation procedure in the material master. your SAP system must be configure by the basis people in order for you to send an external mail.List of Suitable Structures (OV9Z) This report is used to identify potential LIS information structures that can be used in the product allocation process.Modify Planning Hierarchy (MC62) This step is a repeat of MC61 where the initial hierarchy was established.To create the Sales Order by More no of Date's User's can easily take the Report from this by selecting Different kinds like Customer Specific [And/Or] Sales Organisation Specific [And/Or] duration of date but Here Date is Mandatory Fields user must have to give date as a selection criteria .10. Each material that is to be considered in allocation scenario must be mapped to an allocation procedure. Date. the allocation data is verified prior to confirming the line item ordered 12.Allocation Procedure Assignment to Material Master (MM02) At the root level of the allocation process are the materials. you have define the IMG in Maintain Output Determination for Billing Documents (Output type MAIL) Program for Sales Order by Customer. Customer .

01.Customer this will be usefull when Selecting the Checkbox Standard Variants . vtweg LIKE vepvg-vtweg. PARAMETERS: vkorg LIKE vepvg-vkorg. "curr.01."Screens.date6(2). SELECT-OPTIONS date FOR vbkd-bstdk DEFAULT sy-datum TO sy-datum OBLIGATORY. DATA: newsal LIKE sal OCCURS " sales document "Net Value of the SalesOrder "material no.2007 --------------------------* REPORT zche_sales_order . date2(15). date5(2). ch TYPE checkbox.date3(8). 0 WITH HEADER LINE. END OF sal.Date . dat LIKE vbak-erdat. vbeln LIKE vbak-vbeln. netwr LIKE vbak-netwr.2007 8530 732 1000 INR *&---------------------------------------------------------------------* *& Report ZCHE_SALES_ORDER *&--------Done by V. matnr LIKE vbap-matnr. vapma. "date. dat LIKE vbak-erdat.vbap. spart LIKE vepvg-spart.vakpa.vepvg. SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK blk2 WITH FRAME TITLE text-002. DATA: amount LIKE vbak-netwr.Sales Order Example Date SalesOrderNo Material Amount Currency 10. DATA: lin LIKE sy-curow VALUE 1.vbak. vertical cursor position at "PAI available in SYST struc.Output .date4(1). *******************Selection**Screen**Design**************************** SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK blk1 WITH FRAME TITLE text-001. DATA: BEGIN OF sal OCCURS 0. checkbox TYPE c .vbpa.Sales Organisation . . waerk LIKE vbak-waerk.In Second level this report will interact with user where they can select date to see the full Details of Sales Order Selection . ****************************Declarations******************************** TABLES: vbkd.Chellavelu on 11. SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK blk1.".

ENDON.sal-dat . " To create Application ToolBar for Display Button * To verify Double click on BANU . sal-netwr UNDER amount./ sy-vline. ELSE. ELSE. ENDAT. PERFORM cus_orga.sal-dat. LOOP AT sal. SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK blk2. IF vkorg <> ''. WRITE: sy-vline. WRITE:/ ' Total Amount:'. SELECTION-SCREEN POSITION 20. ELSE. WRITE:sy-vline. amount. ********************First**Level**Operation***************************** IF chk1 <> 'X'. PARAMETERS: chk1 AS CHECKBOX. * FORMAT HOTSPOT ON. ULINE. ENDIF. sal-ch AS CHECKBOX. ENDIF. ENDIF. amount = amount + sal-netwr. AT LAST.SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF LINE. ON CHANGE OF sal-dat. IF vkorg <> ''. SUM. * FORMAT HOTSPOT OFF. ELSE. PERFORM cus_orga_else. amount. PARAMETERS: kunnr1 LIKE vbpa-kunnr. PERFORM organisation_else. CLEAR amount. ENDIF. sal-ch AS CHECKBOX. **********************Interaction with report************************** SET PF-STATUS 'BANU'. IF sy-tabix = 1. WRITE:sy-vline. * Displaying the contents which is selected from table by * -selection conditions SORT sal BY dat. ENDLOOP. SELECTION-SCREEN POSITION 10. PERFORM organisation. CLEAR amount. FORMAT COLOR = 3. SELECTION-SCREEN END OF LINE.

IF sy-subrc NE 0.AT USER-COMMAND. WRITE:/ sy-vline. newsal-netwr. AT 14 sy-vline. LOOP AT sal WHERE dat = dat. ENDON. " This will execute after pressing Display Button CASE sy-ucomm.newsal-vbeln.AT 48 sy-vline.AT 27 sy-vline.sy-vline. newsal-matnr = sal-matnr.newsal-dat. PERFORM selection. newsal-matnr. ENDIF. newsal-netwr = sal-netwr.'Order Value(AMT) Currency '. ENDIF. WRITE:/ sy-vline.AT 27 sy-vline. ENDIF. newsal-dat = sal-dat. FORMAT COLOR = 1. newsal-ch = 'X'. AT 48 sy-vline. FORMAT COLOR OFF. . DO. ENDLOOP. ENDDO. newsal-waerk. EXIT. by date which is * .'Date'. WRITE:sy-vline. IF checkbox = 'X'. APPEND newsal. AT 27 sy-vline. WRITE:/ sy-vline. PERFORM datecon.sy-vline. 'Order Material'. LOOP AT newsal.AT 14 sy-vline. ELSE. ENDCASE. READ LINE lin FIELD VALUE sal-ch INTO checkbox. "process *&---------This will display the values for selected dates from new --* *---------------------internal Table (newsal)-------------------------* *& Form SELECTION *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM selection. lin = lin + 1. ON CHANGE OF newsal-dat.AT 48 sy-vline.sy-vline. newsal-waerk = sal-waerk. 'Order NO'. IF sy-tabix <> 1. sy-vline. WHEN 'DISP'. ULINE. WRITE: sy-vline. free newsal.AT 48 sy-vline.selected by CheckBox FORM process.AT 27 sy-vline. ************************ SUB ROUTINE Area ****************************** *This Process SubRoutine will assign the values from current * -InternalTable (sal) into other IT(newsal).newsal-dat. ENDFORM. PERFORM process. newsal-vbeln = sal-vbeln. AT 14 sy-vline. ULINE.

date5 = date3(2). . sal-netwr. * DELETE ADJACENT DUPLICATES FROM dat COMPARING dat. date4 = date2+11. AT 15 'Total Amount for selected month:'. IF date4 <> '. ENDWHILE. FREE newsal. ENDIF. date2 = sy-lisel(17). SHIFT date2 LEFT BY 4 PLACES. WRITE:/ sy-vline. FORMAT COLOR = 3. lin = 1. ENDFORM. CONCATENATE date4 date3 INTO date3. ENDFORM. ENDAT. CONCATENATE date3 date6 date5 INTO date3. SHIFT date2 RIGHT. date6 = date3+2. "DATECON * Here we are doing different kinds of selections by the EndUser's needs *&---------When user selectiong an Sales Organisation-----------------* *& Form ORGANISATION *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM organisation.'. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~vkorg = vkorg. sal-matnr.AT LAST. "SELECTION * This Date convertion is must for pick the particular Date from the * -displayed line. ULINE. * SORT dat BY dat. WHILE date2 <> ''.sal-waerk. SUM. FORMAT COLOR OFF. ULINE. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln. ENDLOOP. date3 = date3+4. newsal-netwr UNDER newsal-netwr. and here we are reversing the Date like YYYY/MM/DD * -because to Check or assign the date we need to give in reverse order *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* *& Form DATECON *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM datecon. dat = date3.

ENDFORM. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln. APPEND sal.V . ENDFORM.com How To Maintain Output Types in SD ERP SAP ==> SD SAP . ENDSELECT. "CUS_ORGA *&------------Without Customer by without choosing CheckBox-----------* *& Form CUS_ORGA_ELSE *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM cus_orga_else.chella. APPEND sal.sal-waerk. sal-matnr. sal-netwr. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln. ENDSELECT. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~vkorg = vkorg AND p~kunnr = kunnr1. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~kunnr = kunnr1. "ORGANISATION *&---------Without Sales Organisation i. ENDFORM. sal-netwr.sal-waerk. ENDSELECT. APPEND sal. sal-matnr. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date.sal-waerk. sal-matnr. ENDSELECT. "ORGANISATION_ELSE *&------------When Selecting Customer by choosing CheckBox------------* *& Form CUS_ORGA *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM cus_orga. sal-netwr. By Chellavelu .e All Organisation------------* *& Form ORGANISATION_ELSE *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM organisation_else.velu@gmail.APPEND sal. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln.

>Output Determination for Sales Documents (or you can use output determination for billing documents depending on your requirement). Invoices & Shipping Notifications. Should I maintain condition records? Where and how to maintain? For getting any output either by print. Fields will display the fields we have selected in the condition table i. Fax. Maintain Output Types: AF00: Inquiry AN00: Quotation . sales doc type. Types of Output: Print Output. 2) Create Condition Table: select the field Sales Doc Type from field catalog & Save 3) Maintain Access Sequence: 4-digits code & description. or any media you have to do output determination. Delivery Notes. E-Mail & EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) --> PRINT OUTPUT: Configuration path: ( following are the steps) 1) SPRO-> IMG-> Basic Functions-> Output Control-> Output Determination-> Output Determination using Condition Technique. Fax. Select Accesses line item and Go To Fields. The detail procedure for Output Determination is : OutPut Determintaion : Output is a form of media from your business to one of its business partners or it can be within the organization. Outputs are usually in the form of Order Confirmations. output determination is also carried by Condition techniques. 4) Assign condition table to access sequence.e. Telex.When I am creating a bill and saving it and then giving issue output to and then header preview. The output can be sent to any of the partners defined in the document. Determining form of output is output determination. the system does not respond. Freight List.

Partner Function (The abbreviated form of the name that identifies the Partner) (During output determination. time. language. medium. the system determines the recipient of the output from the master record for the specified partner function. Partner Function Abbreviation. Customer. Customer No. Once you press enter you will come across 2 key combinations: Sales organisation/ Customer Number: fill SO.print specification Sap Script. go to Control Data. You Can Maintain: Languages of Output Partners (to whom you need to send output) Print Program. condition type and leave requirement and manual only columns as blank. Maintain Output Determination Procedure: V10000 (Standard Procedure). Output device: LP01. Determination Rule: link the 6-digit procedure code to doc types. It contains: Sales Orgnisation. Here mention the output type i. Partner to whom the output should be sent.BA00: Order Confirmation LD00: Delivery RD00: Invoice Select BA00 & Copy & Rename. you can explicitly specify a recipient that will override the . Select the procedure. Select document type and click on Communication. time. medium. Suffix 2: order_confir & flag on print immediately. Go to new entries and create your own 6-digit code with description. Create Condition Records: VV11.e. Give the same 4-digit code as given to access sequence. Spool request Name: SD_003. Mention partner function. In this field.layout Assign Output Types to Partner Functions: go to new entries & assign your output type to partner functions.

Path For Output Determination For Sales Documents: Logistics -> Sales/distribution > Master data -> Output -> Sales Document -> Create (t-code VV11) Path for Output Determination for Delivery Documents : Logistics -> Sales/distribution -> Master data -> Output -> shipping -> Create ( t-ode VV21) Path for Output Determination for Billing Documents : Logistics -> Sales/distribution -> Master data -> Output -> Billing Document -> Create ( t.). 01 Credit limit 02 Political reasons 03 Bottleneck material 04 Export papers missng 05 Check free of ch.code VV31) lease follow the below path: IMG .Shipping .standard partner. Partner Function (abbreviation).dlv 06 No printing 07 Quantity Change Print DDueList SpK SpW .Execute . and uncheck if the option Print is checked.Define Reasons for Blocking in Shipping Here select the delivery block that is blocking your order/delivery.Deliveries . Time & Language. There must also be a master record for the partner that is specified explicitly. Partner. Time & Language. Display View "Deliveries: Blocking Reasons/Criteria": Overview DB Delivery block descr Order Conf.Logistics Execution .} Order Type: Document Type. Medium.Define Reasons for Blocking in Shipping . Medium.

We have to assign the routine 2 to sales order output types and 3 routine to delivery output types to restrict from output if the docuement exceeds by credit limit.08 Kanban Delivery Printing block field: Indicates whether the system automatically blocks output for sales documents that are blocked for delivery. Note: The particular output that is affected by a delivery block is determined in output control. SAP Sales Order Processing Overview SAP Sales Order Processing system allowed you to manage customer orders in a logical ways. you may want to block the printing of order confirmations. This paper will introduce to you the various features of the Sales Order Processing under the SD modules. PS: If the document is exceeds by the credit limit output type will not determine and as well as we should not give the output type in sales order. Table of Contents Purpose of SAP Sales Order Processing System Integrated Function Modules Business Flow of the SAP Sales Process SAP Sales Organisation Key Fields In Sales Order Transaction Codes In Sales Order Processing Important Master Record Material Master Record Sales Views In Material Master Customer Master Record Sales Unit of Measure Delivery Plant Pricing Master Record . Example : In the case of sales orders that are blocked for delivery because of credit reasons.

Table of Contents IMG Menu ± The Starting Point Start of the SAP Sales and Distribution Configurations The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Organization Where does you maintain the Standard Text? The Structure Configuration : Define Distribution Channel The Structure Configuration : Define Division Where is the Division Used? The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Office The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Group Where are the Sales Org..Sales Document Flow Goods Movement In SD Stock Overview Availability Checks For Customer Order Credit Management In SD Sales Information System Report Sample : List of Sales Orders Change Logging In SD Similar Interface Output Determination Delivery To Customer Customer Invoice Automatic Accounting Posting Appendix A: SAP User Menu Appendix B: Short Cut Keys In SAP Menu A Step by Step Guide to the SAP SD Sales Order Processing Configurations This paper will provide you with a step by step guide to the configuration of the Sales Order Processing under the SD modules. Ch. and Plant Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area to Credit Control Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Business Area Account Assignment Setup Partner Determination Where will the Partner Fuctions be used? Log of Incomplete Items ± Define Incompleteness Procedures Assign Incompleteness Procedures Define Status Groups Configuring SD : Common Distribution Channels . Sales Off and Sales Grp Used? Configuring The Link : Sales Organization Assignment Configuring The Link : Distribution Channel Assignment Configuring The Link : Division Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Office to Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Group to Sales Office Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Org. Dist. Dist Chl. Div.

Sales Documents ± Sales Document Header Define Sales Document Types Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents Define Order Reasons Where is the Sales Order Reasons used? .Where the Common Distriution Channel was used? Configuring SD : Common Division Where the Common Divisions was used? Pricing : Define Condition Table Where are the Pricing Condition Keys used? Pricing : Define Condition Type Pricing : Define Access Sequences Pricing : Define and Assign Pricing Procedures Customer Pricing Procedure .CuPP Where will the Customer Pricing Procedure be used? Document Pricing Procedure Assign Document Pricing Procedures To Order Types Assign document pricing procedures to billing types Define Pricing Procedure Determination Where are the Sales Order Pricing Procedure used? Pricing : Define Pricing By Item Category Activate pricing for item categories Activate cost determination for item categories Where does VPRS determine the price from? Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Define Checking Group Where are the Availability Checks used? Define Material Block For Other Users Where is Checking Groups Default used? Carry Out Control For Availability Check Define Procedure By Requirements Class Define Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category Checking Rule For Updating Backorders Define Default Settings Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling Output Control ± Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents Maintain Output Types Maintain Access Sequences Assign Output Types To Partner Functions Maintain Output Determination Procedure Assign Output Determination Procedures Assign sales document items Define Print Parameters Where is Output Type used? Double click on the Output type line item to see the details.

Sales Documents ± Sales Document Item Define Item Categories Double click the Item Category to check the settings. and Plant Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area to Credit Control Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Business Area Account Assignment Setup Partner Determination Where will the Partner Fuctions be used? Log of Incomplete Items ± Define Incompleteness Procedures Assign Incompleteness Procedures Define Status Groups . Table of Contents IMG Menu ± The Starting Point Start of the SAP Sales and Distribution Configurations The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Organization Where does you maintain the Standard Text? The Structure Configuration : Define Distribution Channel The Structure Configuration : Define Division Where is the Division Used? The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Office The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Group Where are the Sales Org. Dist Chl. Dist. Sales Off and Sales Grp Used? Configuring The Link : Sales Organization Assignment Configuring The Link : Distribution Channel Assignment Configuring The Link : Division Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Office to Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Group to Sales Office Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Org. Where is the Sales Order Item Category used? Define Item Category Groups Where is the Item Category Groups used? Define Default Values For Material Type Define Item Category Usage Assign Item Categories Define Reasons For Rejection Where is the Reason For Rejection used? Schedule Lines Define Schedule Line Categories Assign Schedule Line Categories Where is the Schedule Line Category used? Sales and Distribution Transaction Code Flow A Step by Step Guide to the SAP SD Sales Order Processing Configurations This paper will provide you with a step by step guide to the configuration of the Sales Order Processing under the SD modules.. Div. Ch.

Sales Documents ± Sales Document Header Define Sales Document Types Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents Define Order Reasons .Configuring SD : Common Distribution Channels Where the Common Distriution Channel was used? Configuring SD : Common Division Where the Common Divisions was used? Pricing : Define Condition Table Where are the Pricing Condition Keys used? Pricing : Define Condition Type Pricing : Define Access Sequences Pricing : Define and Assign Pricing Procedures Customer Pricing Procedure .CuPP Where will the Customer Pricing Procedure be used? Document Pricing Procedure Assign Document Pricing Procedures To Order Types Assign document pricing procedures to billing types Define Pricing Procedure Determination Where are the Sales Order Pricing Procedure used? Pricing : Define Pricing By Item Category Activate pricing for item categories Activate cost determination for item categories Where does VPRS determine the price from? Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Define Checking Group Where are the Availability Checks used? Define Material Block For Other Users Where is Checking Groups Default used? Carry Out Control For Availability Check Define Procedure By Requirements Class Define Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category Checking Rule For Updating Backorders Define Default Settings Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling Output Control ± Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents Maintain Output Types Maintain Access Sequences Assign Output Types To Partner Functions Maintain Output Determination Procedure Assign Output Determination Procedures Assign sales document items Define Print Parameters Where is Output Type used? Double click on the Output type line item to see the details.

Each one of the support team is a part of support group. Whenever a customer logs a call he /she has to mention to which work group (by name). The issues or the tickets(problems) which are arised is taken care of on priority basis by the support team consultants. Each and every seviority as got its time limits before that we have to fix the error. 3.to actuate and to give the right solution in right time. 1. Medium and Low. The customer or the end user logs a call through any tool or by mail (RADIX).This is the job of the support consultant. Where is the Sales Order Item Category used? Define Item Category Groups Where is the Item Category Groups used? Define Default Values For Material Type Define Item Category Usage Assign Item Categories Define Reasons For Rejection Where is the Reason For Rejection used? Schedule Lines Define Schedule Line Categories Assign Schedule Line Categories Where is the Schedule Line Category used? Sales and Distribution Transaction Code Flow SAP Tickets .What Is That? Handling tickets is called Issue Tracking system.to analyse. The main job of the supporting consultant is to provide assistance on line to the customer or the organisation where SAP is already implemented for which the person should be very strong in the subject and the process which are implemented in SAP at the client side to understand.Where is the Sales Order Reasons used? Sales Documents ± Sales Document Item Define Item Categories Double click the Item Category to check the settings. The work process in support projects are given below for your reference. . The errors or bugs forwarded by the end user to the support team are prioritized under three seviority High. 2.

An example: Tickets in SD can be considered as the problems which the end user or the employee in the company face while working on R/3. Once the calls came to the work group the support consultant or the team need to send an IR (Initial Response) to the user depending upon the priority of the calls. To begin with . . then the end user will test it in the QA client and after approval the BASIS consultant has to transport it to the PRODUCTION client. we should give "TICKET" to you for not knowing it.Low. BILLING). He raises a ticket and the priority is set in one of the below: 1.4. what I understand is that if any configuration or customization is required to solve the issue. Medium 3.None) 5. High. ( Without Shipping point the document becomes INCOMPLETE and he will not be able to proceed further like DELIVERY. then the consultant have to work on DEV Client. Tickets usually occur during the implementation or after theimplementation of the project. (Top. debugged by the support consultant or the team. Then the error is fixed.High. Now you need to solve this ticket. In summary. Then it is informed to the end user/customer/super user about the changes which have moved to the production server by CTS process. every ticket has the particular deadline alert so your responsibility is to finish it before that deadline. Create Sales order for a customer from a New plant . You would analyze the problem and identify that the SP configuration has to be done for the new plant. You do the change and Request one more Transport to BASIS for QA client. These are the process.Med. Then after testing properly by generating TR(Transport Request through the basis admin) 6. since shipping point determination is not happened . The End user will test the same by creating a sales order for the new plant and approve it. Low 2. You would request a transport for DEV CLIENT to BASIS. There can be numerous problem which can occur in the production support and a person who is working in the support has to resolve those tickets in the limited duration. Here is an eg of a ticket raise: End user is not able to 1.

*Or in details description:* SLA are Service Level Agreements to resolve the tickets by the market. Om Prakash. customer contact details. Medium priority incident has a 3 days time to resolve etc *-.. SLA means Service Level agreement.Anu radha SLA's are nothing but Service level agreements.Service Level Agreement What is maintaining SLA in production support? SLA is an abbreviation for "Service Level Agreement". It means to have guaranteed reaction or resolving times for incidents (= trouble tickets). For instance you could have defined the following SLA levels For example: Gold: Reaction time = 30 minutes.) and for each ticket there will be a severity for example business critical issues or problems may be treated as high or top . Tips by: Sourav.Finally. High priority incident has to be resolved on 10 hours. This can be for example categorized based on criticality of the incident. problem. resolving time = 24 hours SLAs normally are part of a contract between a customer and a service provider. The SLA's are applicable in Production as well as maintanence support projects. It is the service agreement between a Company and a service provider. resolving time = 4 hours Silver: Reaction time = 4 hours. Prabbath. For example an IT Organization providing support of SAP / other software / hardware has a agreement. you request a transport to move the changes to PRODUCTION. What I have given is a small example. For example: if your company follows a ticketing process(a ticket is nothing but an environment contains complete description of the problem which contains Short description. These are defined in project preparation phase and client would have made an agreement with the company for the level of service. You would get some real issues with severity HIGH in your day-day support. sreen shots of the error etxc. Biswajit Sarangi What Is Maintaining SLA . Once the change is deployed in production the TICKET is closed.

IPRT --. The Functional Specification defines what the functionality will be of a particulat area that is to be precise a transaction in SAP terminology. The Functional Spec (Specification) which is a comprehensive document is created after the (SRS) Software Requirements Document. b) Clearly and unambiguously provides all the information necessary for the technical consultants to develop the objects. 2.. The Functional Specification describes the features of the desired functinality. What Are Functional Specification in SAP? To speak at macro level that is at projet manager or at senior levels.Problem response time ----. At the consultant level the functional spects are preapred by functinal consultants on any functionality for the purpose of getting the same functinality designed by the technical pepole as most of the times the functionalities according to the requirements of the clients are not available on ready made basis.severitie's. SLA's has two important time specifications 1. In those case your company or your team has to deliver the solution to the customer in agreed time limit or otherwise you might end up missing SLA's. Elsewhre organizations combine these two documents into a single document.this is nothing but time taken to respond to the problem.initial problem response time --. that is detchnical developement process. The Functional Specification document to create a detailed design document that explains in detail how the software will be designed and developed. .and contains the technical information and the data needed for the design and developement. PRT --. Both IPRT and PRT will be different for different severitie's. It describes the product's features as seen by the stake holders.this is nothing but time taken to solve the issue or problem. It provides more details on selected items originally described in the Software Requirements Template. The functional specification translates the Software Requirements template into a technical description which a) Ensures that the product feature requirements are correctly understood before moving into the next step.

analyse and solve the issue . 2) Functional consultant know more about business process unlike Business consultant.When an issue comes diagnose. Fahad Role of a mySAP Functional Consultant What are the differences between a functional and business consultant? The difference between Functional consultant and Business consultant are as follows: 1) A funcitonal consultant is able to configure the system unlike business consultant.Responsible for any enhancements . 3) A business consultant will bring business process knowledge and provide it to functional consultant who in turn used this knowledge to configure the system. *-. which is just 5 % of Total SAP. Tips by: Madhuuri.Rocky The responsibilities of a support consultant are: .Things differ from one implementation to another.Which has impact on Business and its work flow Note * This documents are preapared in Vanilla SAP Standards -.have different names 8) Future Impact & Change Assessement 9) Functional Design (Module Wise) 10) Risk Assessement 11) Process Metrics and Many More-.Let me throw some light on documentation which is prepared before and in a project: 1) Templates 2) Heat Analysis 3) Fit Gap or Gap Analysis 4) Business Process Design 5) Business Process Model 6) Business Change & Impact 7) Configuration Design. and it always depends on the type of business which is opting for SAP. 4) Functional consultant has more configuration knolwledge then Business consultant.Writing functional specs and interacting with Abapers to develop any user exits .Primarily responsible for Handling tickets and application support to the endusers .

understanding of processes. performing appropriately and the business flow is complete and correct. Hence. all this forms the part of AS IS document. Flow diagrams and DFD are prepared. a feeling for defects and general a common sense.Training the end users and preparing end user training material Sistla *-- For those who wished to know the role of a functional consultant. he identifies the use cases and transforms them into logical and technical views. design current business flows. I think it won't be possible for me or anybody to define everything but I will try to summarize it: 1. After go live he guarantees that the procedures remain usable and consistent in real live situation and proposes enhancements. in all we can say getting through with current business setup. The main duty of a consultant is to transfer external know-how to the client. Then the main task starts: customizing the respective business area and making sure the system reacts in the manner according to the constraints of the requested use case. During go live he assists the technical staff by testing the behaviour of the system. Functional consultant is expected to generate knowledge about the current business process. study current business processes and its complication. Role of a Functional Consultant in an End To End Implementation When you talk about the role of a Functional consultant in an end to end implementation. most of the time in Vision format. . transforms the essence into an abstract and algorithmic business model. The consultant takes care that proper training is given to the users and that the system is usable. It is not manpower that counts but intelligence. Below is one view: A functional consultant evaluates the demands in talking with the customer's representatives.. The consultant documents the settings and prepares proper guidelines that allow other consultants to do further changes or repairs with due efforts.

Unit testing is refer to the module which are going to implement. it is a simultaneous process. which can be also siad as the result of mapping and gap analysis. you can find all the steps on SAP site. Mapping and GAP analysis is done for each module. methodlogy. team members. but all I can tell you about it is that it is SAP standard implementation methodology. but as per my experience in implementation. Sometimes Functional consultants are also expected to prepare test scripts for testing the configured scenarios. reporting system. this documentation is called TO BE. it won't be possible for me to explain it here. . Role of SAP Consultant In Testing 1. ASAP stands for Accerlated SAP. dates and schedules. 3. SD. invoice document are printed in the required format and showing the correct data. What is Unit testing and Integration Testing? Testing : the core team members along with endusers will test whether the postings done in SAP is resulting as per the requirements of the organisation.Consultants. What is the role of SD Consultant in Testing while implementing the project? 2. through google. Before starting configuring future business processes in SAP. 5. 4. responsibilities. some companies follow typical SDLC steps. working hours which have been predicided are formally defined. duties. I have seen people defining integration after mapping. 6. the DFD/ERD are prepared. Everything configured has to be documented as per their categories in the form of predefined templates. there will be test script based on that testing will be performed. They will test whether the output documents such as purchase order. FICO etc. which SAP prescribes but is not mandatory for any company to follow. reading it from there won't give you a great knowledge about ASAP but will obviously get you to know the definitions of various term. The project normally starts off with a Kick off meeting in which the team size.2. such as IBM follow some blue Methodlogy. End user manual and user training is also expected from F. MM. ASAP. these have to be then approved by the team leads or who ever the consultant is reporting to. gap analysis and configuration is done.

like e. System Integration security Testing 4. MM-SD-FICO for example. If BPP defination says 5 seconds for PGI then it should be 5 and not 6 second. Security testing you will be testing different roles and functionalities and will check and signoff.4 and 5 seperately alone one by one using test cases and test data. and you will be testing using test cases which give a full cyclic test from order to invoice. Performance Testing 5. Regression testing is reffered to a test which verfies that some new configuration doesnot adversly impact existing functionality. User Acceptance Testing: Refers to Customer testing. Integration testing is also called SIT ( System integration testing) Testing mathologies and types: there are 6 types of testings: 1.2. Most commonly use are Test Director: which is used to record requirement. User Acceptance testing 6. This will be done on each phase of testing. We will be incorporating defects that are coming during these testings using different test cases. System Testing 3. PGI. then 2-delivery.Integration testing will be cross the modules. We will not be looking and checking/testing any integration between order and delivery.g. in SD standard order cycle. Like e. we do have 1-create order. . Usually it is done using software. Whrereas System testing you will be testing the full cycle with it's integration. The UAT will be performed through the execution of predefined business scenarios. Regression Testing Unit testing is done in bit and pieces. Unit Testing 2.g.3. which combine various business processes. We use different software during testing. then 3-transfer order. then 4-PGI and then 5-Invoice. delivery and TO. TO and PGI and then invoice. preparing test plan and then recording the progress. So we will be testing 1. Performance testing is refered to as how much time / second will take to perform some actions. The user test model is comprised of a sub-set of system integration test cases.

Functional Unit Testing .Technical Unit Testing . custom program. I would also note that when a new implementation is being done you will want to conduct at least one cut over test from the old system to the new and you should probably do several. What kind of testings that are carried out in testing server? . or any systemic problem. the test usually consists of a test data set that is processed according to the new program.Volume Testing . system settings or a custom development (it may follow the technical unit testing) These usually use actual data or data that is masked but essentially the same as a real data set. A successful test will show identical results when both the legacy system and new system results are compared. Parallel Testing= Testing the new system or processes with a complete data set while running the same processes in the legacy system. development or configuration within the context of any other functions that the process. This is an automatic tool. A successful test indicates that the processes will not slow or crash the system due to a full data set being utilized. A successful test indicates that the processes work as designed and integrate with other functions without causing any problems in any integrated areas. A successful test shows that the development or configuration works as designed and the data is accurate as a result. IntegrationTesting= Testing a process. system resources issues. Functional Unit Testing= Test of configuration.Parallel Testing? Technical Unit Testing= Test of some technical development such as a user exit. The test should examine all data involved across all modules and any data indirectly affected. What does the following terms means : . or interface. A successful test only proves the developed code works and that it performed the process as as designed.Mercury Load Runner: is used for performance testing. Volume Testing= testing a full data set that is either actual or masked to insure that the entire volume does cause system problems such as network transmission problems.IntegrationTesting . development or functionality will touch or integrate .

SAP End user only use the SAP system just to fetch some info. changes & modification/updation in currently installed SAP system for the end users.like this small things are always done by the enduser. Gregrobinette What is the Difference between Consultant & End users? SAP consultant role is to build the system. Initiallly the OM is created by sap consultant . this has to be created by the enduser rather than depending up on the implementor. or to create new thing. Unit testing (where an individual process relevant to a SD or MM etc is tested) 2.. In course of time a new department has appeared in the company of the client .1. The roles and responsibilities of end users is working in easy access menu they will not have authorizations of using img settings if they get doubt they will send query to the implemented company and just entering day to day transactions. similarly new job and position.. So a end user is just using the final product which it is meant for and consultnat design the product/updation and modification. . 3. Regressive Testing ( Entire Process) 3.. we do come across entire Org Management creation by an end user after the Personnel strucutre is created. Individual Testing ( Individually which we've created) 2. Integration testing (where a process is tested that cuts across all areas of SAP). Integration Testing ( Along with other integrated modules) The 3 types of testing is as follows:1. In sap HR . creation Job and Position and its occupancy is with in the limits of an enduser. The entire work of OM is purely depends upon the enduser. Roles and Responsibilities of End User: Using the software at the end or after the implementation is an End User.. Stress testing (where lots of transactions are run to see if the system can handle the data) Tips by: Teresa Pittari. OM objects like creation of Org Unit means functional area or dpt .

One would need user id and password to access SAP be it a developer. goods receipt.. what is the Role of Core Team Membere & Consultants? The main responsibility of the core team member will to impart knowledge about the companies processes to the SAP Consultants. Nitin. Like this lot of roles are there for an end user. consultant. During the SAP Implementation Project. The SAP consultants will then start mapping this into the system and provide the best possible solution that can be incorporated using the TO-BE documents..that will reach as ticket to the support team Tips by: Pascal. . What Are SAP End User Manual It is the same for every other modules although here I reference it mainly for SAP HR. Whatever the problems come across during the enduser utilisation of sap . The SAP consultants will then train the core team members for how to use the SAP system. The main aim is to map the companies processes into the system. creating purchase orders. Sushil Pandey.After from this running periodical payroll and Ensuring of the Time schedules ( Work Schedules) of each employee is done from sap easy access by an enduser and the show run of payroll everymonth is by the enduser only. sales orders etc. They work in the specialist departments in the company and are available to other users as contact persons. Power Users are users with advanced knowledge in certain applications and with special permissions or roles. End user is the one who performs transactions in SAP after it goes live. Somasekhar Explain what are the job responsibilities of END user & POWER user. administrator. that will describe the format of the AS-IS documentation wherein the core team members will write the different processes of the company into these documents and submit it to the SAP Consultants. or end user. The consultants will be providing the core team members with templets. Such as posting an invoice.

You just place them at one place and publish it for their usage in future for any of their new joinees as an end-user. Even if you train them well. .NO. .Use of the Code . Do they have any computer background or not. again the end-user team disappears after some time.user and give the solutions (ready to use) These problems you can come across while giving the in house training for the endusers. If they get any better job outside they will resign and go out. F) Every consultant is aware that the entire Organsiational Management is with end user only.1) You should understand which targeted group for the end-user training is for. Hence we should prepare a document which explains the following things comfortably: A) All the buttons and Screens we have in sap and its importance for an end-user. C) The STEP by STEP usage methodology with screen shots and explanatory foot notes for each Transaction code. Means consultant should train the end user in entire OM.Remarks/Any Comment E) Highlight the common troubles during the usage of SAP by an end.Achieved Result . 2) In what way they are going to make use of the manuals supplied to them during the course of training.Expected Result .Navigation path . Let us focus on how to prepare manuals: In the client side . D) Prepare a book a table and columns which should have the following information: .Sl. B) All the transaction codes used by end user.Transaction Code . That is why implementing company( Client ) expects SAP Consultants to prepare documents which are self explanatory (even to a layman in SAP) and study themselves and use the sap easy access very comfortably. End Users are not permanent.

. Skills on the Up We polled a number of agents and other sources of information and came up with the following skills that are likely to be on the up over the next few years. Project Management . 1. should allotted. J) Glossary of terms and expansion of Acronyms. I'm sure if we'd polled others the list might have been slightly different. I) Demo. J2EE 2. but merely the opinions of a few agents that we asked. For example : info type 0001 Org Assignment insists about the three structures of the HR. C# 4. When an employee is hired into the company . PA30. but merely the opinions of a few agents.G) We should inform the importance of info types and usage for our purposes at expert mode. this is not definitive. Like this each consultant should focus on end user training and prepare the documents. . Like this whatever comes across in SAP Easy Access should be insisted through the training of end users. PA40 etc. now the end-user in a position to understand which employee group and subgroup.. H) Each field in the international infotypes should be explained very clearly and ensure that they are comfortable with the fields of infotypes which have been configured for their company. Abbreviations should be given. even taking into account offshore outsourcing and Fast Track Visa Workers.. Anyone with these skills is likely to be employed.Net 3. at good rates. *-.user point of view .Somasekhar The top ten IT skills to have for the next few years This is not a scientific survey. exercises and solutions should be provided in the manuals. Emp Sub Group. Personnel Area and Sub Area and its importance and relevance to their company so as to understand while processing them from the end. Personnel Area And Sub Area etc. don't worry. If you have a highly valued skill that isn't on here. We should explain each sub field like Emp Group.

Business Analysts are also less immune to offshore outsourcing. Java New Hot Skills The top three are definitely becoming very hot skills. and anyone who has them should stand in good stead. VB. Those where you might find it a bit of a struggle in the next few years are the skills from before the previous downturn like Cobol. Unix and C++ are still the most sought after skills currently. Business Analysis 8. DB2 etc. SAP continues to do well and is taking market share from its rivals. as they have to remain reasonably close to the business users. and is also expected to gain even more market share in the coming years. NT Novell 10. Oracle 8 and 9i 6. Siebel also gained an honourable mention. SAP 7. Honourable Mentions Other skills that also received honourable mention for the future are some of those from before the downturn such as:SQL Unix C++ VB Access ASP In fact SQL. It is a much underrated skill. Oracle continues to be very strong. It's good to see Project Management up there. .net 9. There is still quite a lively market for PL/I though.5. CICS.

Select ->extended-> allow other users in network. Mini SAP System Requirement and How to Get it Mini SAP System Requirement The system Requirements are : General Requirements Operating System: Windows 2000 (Service Pack2 or higher). Activate new configurations.2 GB disk space (recommended to have 6 GB hard disk drive space) (120 MB DB software. this is not a definitive list. Windows NT Linux Internet Explorer 5.9 GB SAP data. The Network must be configured for installation and the MS Loopback Adapter must be configured when you start the system without a network connection! Special Requirements for Installations on Windows XP In the file C:\Windows\system\32\drivers\etc\hosts the current IP address and the host name must be defined as <IP address><Host name> Open the network connectivity definition with start->control panel->network connections for defining the network connection.As I said at the start. 2. No SAPDB must be installed on your PC. but we thought it would be worthwhile to pass on what agents believe to be the skills that they think they will be looking for more and more in the next few years. 100 MB SAP GUI + temporary free space for the installation) The file C:\WINNT\system32\drivers\etc\services (Windows 2000) or C:\Windows\system\32\drivers\etc\services (Windows XP) must not include an entry for port 3600.01 or higher At least 192 MB RAM (recommended to have 256 MB of RAM) At least 512 MB paging file At least 3. Select remote desktop within extended configuration menu. A possible entry can be excluded by using the symbol '#'. ********* . The hostname of the PC must not be longer than 13 characters. Windows XP (Home or Professional).

******* You can get your MiniSAP with the book :ABAP Objects: An introduction to Programming SAP Applications by Horst Keller. file interface. Brand new topics found in the new edition include SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP. RTTS. Web Dynpro for ABAP. It comes with 2 cds (Mini Basis SAP kernel + database). Sascha Kruger. XML).What is MiniSAP? How to get Mini SAP? In order to get the free Mini SAP. etc. interface technologies (RFC. dynamic tokens and procedure calls Data und communication interfaces: RFC. It also includes the SQL server. web services. controls and Web Dynpro Persistent data: DB access. selection screens. dynamic programming. lists. assertions. Basic elements of ABAP Objects Classic modularisation and program execution Avoiding erros and error handling GUI programming: dynpros.. J. this 1000+ page book describes all concepts of modern ABAP up to Release 7.0 (including a "sneak preview" of Release 7. class-based exception handling. among others. or ABAP Objects Reference Book H. Keller. Class Builder. Procedural techniques are also covered where necessary. XML . Based on ABAP Objects. and test tools. you need to buy the following book where in you will get two CD's of SAP WAS (Web Application Server) which can be installed in your system and practice ABAP programming etc. Object Navigator. Jacobitz The first complete language reference book for ABAP! This book represents the first complete and systematic language reference book for ABAP Objects. Object Services. Highlights: y y y y y y y y y SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP Development basics: ABAP Workbench. Regular Expressions. SAP Press.. data clusters Dynamic programming: field symbols. ICF. ICF. Object Services. ISBN 0-201-75080-5. Shared Objects.10).

the system automatically adopts the first value entered by the user at the beginning of the transaction for the rest of the current terminal session. if you are a customer of SAP and have an OSS user-id. then User maintenance -> Users. It will costs you 25 EURO. Minisap contains only SAP BASIS where you can do your ABAP. For example. so that i can assign the same in SU01? You can do in SE80. If you want create paramenter id 'TEST' means: . Enter the IDs you want in the Parameter register during user maintenance How to create a new user parameter id . User parameter: You can fill fields on screens with default values from SAP memory using parameter IDs. a user only has authorization for company code 0001. However. then you can also buy the Minisap software directly from the Sap service market. Choose Tools -> Administration.The book also includes two CDs carrying a fully operational SAP Basis System. If this company code is not predetermined using a parameter ID in the user master record.de/knowledgecat Search for "MiniSAP Basis 4. this value has to be re-entered the next time the user logs on to the system Fields on screens are only ever automatically filled with the value saved under the parameter ID of a data element if the Set Parameter/Get Parameter attributes for the corresponding fields have been explicitly set in the Screen Painter. the system automatically fills the field Company code with the value µ001¶ on all screens he or she calls. choose Other Objects. By entering the value '0001' in field COCD in the Parameter register in this user¶s master record (SU01).sap-ag. ************** Alternatively. https://www010. Enter name and Create. : 50043446).6D November 2000 (English)" (Item nbr. and containing all the example programs from the book. What Is User Specific Parameter Explain what is user specific parameter.

You assign default values that you have maintained in the Customizing to a particualt user by entering the key of the default value in the user master record under the parameter ID "EVO". They can be included in the T code SU3 in the parameter tab.STEP 1: First add value 'TEST' in TPARA Table. For the company the new package may not work the way they expected. Get it wrong and the vendor may get paid late or have to resort to lawyers to get paid and tarnish their reputation. To create a Parameter Id for a Data Element. In se11 --> Data element name --> Futher Charactersitics --> Parameter Id --> Type name example ZPARA --> Dbl click in it and create. LV_TEST = 'TEST'. be late or cost a more than budgeted for and take management will take their eye off running their business.This parameter id will define certain Purchasing authorizations For one or more users. STEP 2 : Assign value to paremeter id DATA : LV_TEST TYPE CHAR10. Successfully Implementing SAP Implementing a package can be a traumatic affair for both the customer and the vendor. Here you can display certain user can display the conditions. EFB . SET PARAMETER ID 'TEST' FIELD LV_TEST. Parameter IDs are usually only used to memorize certain user-specific settings. EVO . to have this Plant/Pur Group id filled when they calls the related transaction. . For example: If the user is responsible with one Purchasing grp/Pur Org/Plant then they adds WERKS/EKGRP parameter here. What are thses User parameter EFB & EVO? What is the full form of this? When it is used? Parameter IDs are used to ease the daily activities of a user.

2. The Project Board will meet regularly to ensure that the project plans are created and being executed as planned. train the users to ensure implementations is smooth as possible into the business. change team and technicians. My top five factors to consider would be: 1. moves from stage to stage with all the deliverables being signed off is resourced properly. 5. The Project Board is part of the governance of the project. as they will be the ones living with the system for hopefully many years to come.Recently a client asked me what I would consider to be the five most important things one should consider before embarking on an implementation.end users. re-engineer some of the businesses process to cope with the package. They will want to feel involved in its implementation. Complete the GAP Analysis. Have detailed Cut Over Plans. implement the software in the best way possible for the organisation set up and tune the software for the particular technical environment. Train the users. although there are many factors to think about after some consideration for me the top five are way ahead of the others. 4. Taking each one in turn: The Project Board The correct set up and operation of the Project Board in my view is major factor in the success failure of the project. Set up a Project Board. Buy in from the end users of the system is absolutely essential if the system is to have a long and stable life in any organisation. key users and the vendor. Early involvement by the end users is absolutely necessary. The Project Board will consist of the stakeholders. apply any software fixes from the vendor. The Resources Three types of resources are absolutely necessary -. GAP Analysis A through gap analysis will identify the gaps between how the business operates ad its . The Technical Team will prepare the systems environment for the package. Secure the resources. 3. The Change Team will identify the gaps between the package and the business requirements. This isn't a simple question.

Customer Balances thru F-22 . Cut Over Plans Detailed plans need to be developed for cutting over from the old system(s) to the new. As per that. Vendor Balances thru F-43 11. Unsupportive users will continually undermine the system and eventually it will be replaced. Cost Element Master Upload 6." Gap analysis is undertaken as a means of bridging that space. Asset Master Upload(Thru As90) 5. Explain Cutover Activities/Strategies in SAP FI. Vendor Master Upload Thru BDC Or LSMW (Will be Taken Care By MM) 3. In SAP world. If you goling live at the middle you have to upload the all P&L Account items and B/S Items. GAP must be closed and customised software can be developed close the gap. often for the purpose of determining how to get from one state to a new state. Cutover Activities or Master Data Uploading Strategies Depending upon the when we are going live. Parallel runs of what will happen over the conversion period using test data. Profit Center Master Upload 8. A gap is sometimes spoken of as "the space between where we are and where we want to be. G/L Balances Thru F-02 10. Customer Master Upload Thru BDC or LSMW (Will be Taken Care By SD) 4. Activities for Golive: 1. GAP must be closed but software cannot be written therefore a workaround is required. Cost Center Master Upload 7. you have to only Upload the B/S Items. In simple terms: Gap means small cracks. convert and watch for a period after wards to ensure nothing unexpected happens. you have to give the information to your core team. Actual gap analysis is time consuming and it plays vital role in blue print stage. Train Users Well trained users will support and defend the system on site. GAP does not need to be closed. gap analysis is the study of the differences between two different information systems or applications( ex.needs against what the package can can't do. existing system or legacy system with Client and new is SAP). If you going live at the financial year start. For each gap there will be one of three outcomes which must be recorded and actioned. In information technology. Therefore the more effort you put into helping the users master the system early the better. G/L Master Upload Thru BDC or LSMW (TC-Fs00 and extended one co code to another company code Fs01) 2.

12.Go live in sequence of phased manner . However. Rollout means ³Inauguration or initial exhibition of a new product´. Vendor Advances thryu F-48 Before uploading Vendor Balances you have to take care of WHT(TDS) Information.Or to go for the combination of both (phased manner implementation for some of the countries and big-bang for others). As per SAP specific definition. Those gaps can be closed either by re-engineering of business process to fit with SAP or we have to use USER exits in case of small deviations or complete enhancements with the help of ABAP to fit with the SAP system. Check for Partner on Equipment Master (IE01) We have a requirement to check that sold-to partner function is mandatory during equipment creation (IE01). Sridhar What is roll out of SAP Project? As per dictionary. Both are quiet a different and has a small relation. the . This can be done via configuration. steering committee decides the rollout strategy. or . User exits are standard gate ways provided by SAP to exit the standard code and we can write our own code with the help of ABAP workbench.V. Rollout strategy normally include the following . Rollout strategy is the most important decision that a client can make during SAP implementation. Normally.Whether to implement SAP simultaneously (also known as big-bang) in all the countries.Satynarayana Difference between the User Exit & Gap analysis. *-. its not new functionality which we are trying to build in sap but its slight enhancement within the same code. Gap analysis is start point of Realization and once blue print is finished we have to find the realization of sap system for client requirment and there will be certain gaps when compared to system fit. rollout is the strategy for international SAP implementation. Customer Advances thru f-29 13. *-.

Now on the configuration for the Transaction set the Partner type to be imported with value "SP" and mark the content field to be mandatory. . You could use the View profile settings in configuration and transaction variant functionality (SHD0) to accomplish this. Hence they only want the partner to be mandatory during IE01 and not IE02.However for change transaction (IE02) the user can delete this partner type without any issues. (This will force the partner field to be available directly on the initial screen when a piece of equipment is created). Is there any other user-exit that can be used? Answer: You could check to see if you could read the partner from the memory within the FM. However. However you could potentially accomplish the same using the following steps without programming. this user-exit doesn't have parameters to partner data. ---> Now set this Transaction variant as a standard variant for this transaction.Leave all other settings to default and save and exit. Explanation Of Purchasing Info Record . This should do the trick. -> As a first step Make sure to add the Partner view as a sub screen to the very first screen using View profile settings for the equipment category in SPRO. We know of a user-exit IEQM0003 that is allows us to put in logic before equipment is saved. .requirement is also to allow users to delete this partner using IE02. ---> Now create a Transaction variant for the standard transaction IE01 and here select the sold to partner custom type and leave the value field blank. -. The user will be forced to enter the sold to party on the screen. I believe only way to do this is using a user-exit.

Automatic If you create info record manually and then create PO manually. and the last PO number will be updated. Availability Period during which the Vendor can supply the material. It includes : 1. 2. It will update 'Order price history'----path is 'environment' and 'order price history' in tcode ME13 . Tolerance Limits for Over Deliveries & Under deliveries 6. Number of last Purchase Order 4. You cannot create auto PO without info record. Then only you will be able to create auto PO. the info record will be created automatically without price updation. For creation auto PO . If info record does not exists and you create PO manually with info record update indicator set. Reminders 3. Planned Delivery Time ( Lead time required by the vendor to deliver the material ) 5. Creation: We can create info record by: 1. Again if you create a PO for the same material the Price will be picked from the last PO which is updated in info record.tab) & not the price in condition record. History: If info update indicator is ticked in PO. the price will be picked from the info record. it will update the order price history in inforecord ( Env. Pricing conditions that you can store for relevant Purchasing Organization or Plant.Usage: Purchasing Info Record is a source of information for the procurement of certain material from certain vendor. you have to create info record manually first and then maintain the source list. Manual 2.

Check img path: SPRO -> Project System -> Dates -> Scheduling -> Specify parameters for Network Scheduling Secondly. Check Account assignment tab of sales order. Thirdly about procurement. For Networks. 3. please go to Extras -> Administrative Data. and the capacity requirements and floats Scheduling types include: 1. Sending: What ME18 (send purchase info record ) does? Network Scheduling In Project System How does the network scheduling happens in PS? Networks and network activities are more suitable for planning resources and scheduling than WBS's and WBS elements.Logs: Is there a way where you can get to know who create a Purchase Info record? In transaction ME13. 2. Backward scheduling: scheduling starting from the finish date. Forward scheduling: scheduling starting from the start date. Scheduling to current date: scheduling starting from the current date. You will see who created on what date. You need to define scheduling parameters in Customizing. WBS can be assigned as Account Assignment in Sales order. . 4. "Today" scheduling: a scheduling type for rescheduling an order if the start date is in the past. Scheduling calculates the earliest and latest dates for the execution of the activities.

If the goods receipt is valuated. you can create services or externally-processed activities. Externally-processed activities give rise to planned costs equivalent to the prices from the purchasing info record or the price in the activity. This service specification is copied to the purchase order where Purchasing can then modify it. Creating such an activity establishes the link to MM Services (MM-SRV). . service activities contain a service specification containing planned activities and value limits for unplanned activities. You can access data from Purchasing for external processing (a purchasing info record. which contains prices and delivery times for external processing). Service activities are maintained for the purchase of services. a purchase requisition is also created. Example: You commission a freelance engineer to design and build a machine. and processed further in Purchasing. the activity is also shown as a purchase requisition commitment or purchase order commitment. When the purchase requisition is activated and converted to a purchase order. whether it gives rise to actual costs. actual costs are posted to the activity and the commitment is reduced by the amount of the purchase order. services are later entered and accepted.When procuring services externally (outsourcing).that is. When you create such an activity. Instead of goods receipts. The valuation variant for the network costing variant determines which price is used for the valuation. Service activities also give rise to planned costs or purchase requisition/order commitments. Unlike externally-processed activities. for example. This means that the invoice receipt may correct the actual costs. The account assignment category in the purchase order determines whether the goods/invoice receipt is valued .